UP-50 & UP-51MD & UP-51MDU & UP-51MDP Volume 1 1st Edition

COLOR VIDEO PRINTER
UP-50
UP-51MD
UP-51MDU
UP-51MDP
SERVICE MANUAL
Volume 1 1st Edition
! WARNING
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than that
contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
! WARNUNG
Die Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt.
Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die
Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind bei
Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegeben
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigung
dazu besitzen.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Ce manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l’entretien. Afin
de réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d’incendie ou de blessure n’effectuer que les
réparations indiquées dans le mode d’emploi à moins d’être qualifié pour en effectuer d’autres.
Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1
Table of Contents
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................. 5

Related manual .......................................................................................................... 5
1. Operating Instructions
2. Service Information
2-1. Main Parts Location .................................................................................... 2-1

2-1-1. Main Block Location .................................................................. 2-1
2-1-2. Board Location ........................................................................... 2-1
2-2. Removal and Installation of Cabinet ........................................................... 2-2
2-2-1. Top Cover ................................................................................... 2-2
2-2-2. Front Panel Assembly ................................................................ 2-2
2-2-3. Rear Panel Assembly ................................................................. 2-3
2-3. Replacement of Main Parts ......................................................................... 2-3
2-3-1. Replacement of VPR-63 Board .................................................. 2-3
2-3-2. Replacement of SY-282 Board .................................................. 2-4
2-3-3. Replacement of IF-764 and IF-767 Boards ................................ 2-4
2-3-4. Replacement of DC Fans (1) ...................................................... 2-5
2-3-5. Replacement of Switching Regulator ......................................... 2-6
2-3-6. Replacement of PRT-13 Board .................................................. 2-6
2-3-7. Replacement of Thermal Head ................................................... 2-7
2-3-8. Replacement of Mechanical Block ............................................ 2-8
2-3-9. Replacement of SE-539 Board ................................................... 2-8
2-3-10. Replacement of Tray Motor ....................................................... 2-9
2-3-11. Replacement of Ribbon Take-Up Motor .................................... 2-9
2-3-12. Replacement of Ribbon Supply Motor .................................... 2-10
2-3-13. Replacement of Stepping Motor .............................................. 2-10
2-3-14. Replacement of Head Motor .................................................... 2-11
2-3-15. Replacement of Paper Feed Assembly ..................................... 2-11
2-3-16. Replacement of Paper Feed Motor ........................................... 2-12
3. Electrical Alignment and Mechanical Alignment
3-1. Electrical Adjustment .................................................................................. 3-1

3-1-1. Output of Test Pattern (Internal Signal) in Service Mode ......... 3-1
3-1-2. Density Adjustment During Thermal Head Replacement ......... 3-3
3-1-3. Electrical Adjustment (Analog Video Block) ............................ 3-4
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 1
3-2. Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................. 3-8
3-2-1. Mechanical Adjustment Mode ................................................... 3-8
3-2-2. Entering the Mechanical Adjustment Mode .............................. 3-8
3-2-3. Normal Operation Check and Automatic Adjustment ............... 3-9
3-3. Upgrading the Firmware ........................................................................... 3-13
3-3-1. Firmware .................................................................................. 3-13
3-3-2. Upgrading ................................................................................. 3-14
3-3-3. Upgrading Method ................................................................... 3-14
3-4. Lamination Head Voltage Adjustment ...................................................... 3-15
3-4-1. Adjusting the Lamination Head Voltage .................................. 3-15
3-5. Ribbon Tension Adjustment ..................................................................... 3-15
3-5-1. Ribbon Tension Adjustment Menu .......................................... 3-16
3-5-2. Adjusting the Ribbon Tension ................................................. 3-16
4. Circuit Operation Description
4-1. Digital Video Signal Processing Block ....................................................... 4-1

4-1-1. Outline ........................................................................................ 4-1
4-1-2. Flow of Image Signal in Each Operating Mode ......................... 4-2
4-1-3. Basic Operation Timing and CPU Block ................................... 4-6
4-1-4. Memory (DRAM) Block .......................................................... 4-10
4-1-5. Memory Control Block ............................................................ 4-12
4-1-6. Color Adjustment Block .......................................................... 4-14
4-1-7. Sampling Clock Generation Block ........................................... 4-15
4-1-8. Masking Block ......................................................................... 4-16
4-1-9. A/D and D/A Conversion Blocks ............................................. 4-16
4-2. Analog Video Signal Processing Block .................................................... 4-17
4-2-1. Outline ...................................................................................... 4-17
4-2-2. Interface Block (IF-764 Board) ................................................ 4-17
4-2-3. Analog Video Signal Processing Block
(Part of VPR-63 Board) ........................................................... 4-18
4-3. Operation Description of Print Control Block Circuit (PRT-13 Board) ... 4-25
4-3-1. CPU Flowchart ......................................................................... 4-25
4-3-2. CPU Memory Map ................................................................... 4-25
4-3-3. Outline of Motor Drive Function Blocks ................................. 4-26
4-3-4. Outline of Sensor Detection Circuits ....................................... 4-30
4-3-5. Head Control Block .................................................................. 4-37
4-4. Circuit Operation Description of SY-282 and IF-767 Boards .................. 4-39
4-4-1. Circuit Operation ...................................................................... 4-39
4-4-2. Communication with Other Boards in Unit ............................. 4-42
4-4-3. VPR (Analog Video Block) Control ........................................ 4-43
4-4-4. RS Communication Control ..................................................... 4-45
2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1
5. Mechanical Description
5-1. Description of Mechanisms ......................................................................... 5-1

5-1-1. Motors ........................................................................................ 5-2
5-1-2. Sensors ....................................................................................... 5-3
5-2. Description of Print Operation .................................................................... 5-4
5-2-1. Position Change During Print Operation ................................... 5-4
5-2-2. Home Position ............................................................................ 5-5
5-2-3. Paper Feed Position .................................................................... 5-6
5-2-4. Print Position .............................................................................. 5-7
5-2-5. Fast Feed Position ...................................................................... 5-7
5-2-6. Paper Remove Position .............................................................. 5-8
5-3. Platen Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 5-9
5-3-1. Gear Ratio of Platen Drive Unit ................................................. 5-9
5-3-2. Print Nonuniformity ................................................................... 5-9
5-4. Paper Feed and Remove Drive Unit .......................................................... 5-10
5-5. Direct Chuck Mechanism .......................................................................... 5-11
6. Troubleshooting
6-1. Video (Image) Related Trouble .................................................................. 6-1

6-2. Mechanical Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 6-2
6-2-1. Outline ........................................................................................ 6-2
6-2-2. Paper Feed Trouble .................................................................... 6-3
6-2-3. Paper Delivery Trouble .............................................................. 6-3
6-2-4. Print Trouble .............................................................................. 6-3
6-2-5. Other Troubles ........................................................................... 6-4
6-3. Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 6-4
6-3-1. Thermal Head Cleaning ............................................................. 6-4
6-3-2. Paper Feed Roller Cleaning ....................................................... 6-4
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual

This is the Service Manual of a UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP color video printer.
This manual describes the information on maintenance and the service information
such as parts replacement and adjustment.
Related manual
In addition to this “Service Manual Vol. 1”, this unit is provided with the manual
below.
. Service Manual Vol. 2 (Not supplied for products.)

Part No.: 9-955-233-21
This manual describes the semiconductors, spare parts, block diagrams, schematic
diagrams, and board layouts of this unit.
. Operation Manual (Supplied for products.)

Part No.: 3-203-596-11
This manual describes the information required for the actual management and
operation of this unit.
. “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (Available on request)

This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search for
semiconductors used in Communication System Solutions Network Company
equipment.
Semiconductors that cannot be searched for on this CD-ROM are listed in the
service manual for the corresponding unit. The service manual contains a com-
plete list of all semiconductors and their ID Nos., and thus should be used together
with the CD-ROM.
Part number: 9-968-546-XX
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5
3-203-596-11 (1)
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP
Color Video Printer
Operating Instructions
Instructions for Use Page 2 GB
FR
Section 1
Mode d’emploi Page 142
Gebrauchsanweisung Seite 282 DE
(For UP-51MD/51MDP)
UP-50
operating instructions
Reprinted from the
UP-51MD
UP-51MDU
UP-51MDP
2000 Sony Corporation

1-1
1-2
English
Table of Contents
Owner’s Record Important safeguards/notices for use in the

medical environments (for UP-51MD/51MDU/
Introduction About This Manual ...........................................................................5
The model and serial numbers are located at the rear. 51MDP)
Record these number in the space provided below. 1. All the equipments connected to this unit shall be System Overview .............................................................................7
Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your certified according to Standard IEC60601-1, System Configuration ........................................................................ 8
Sony dealer regarding this product. IEC60950, IEC60065 or other IEC/ISO Standards
applicable to the equipments.
Model No.
2. When this unit is used together with other equipment
Serial No.
in the patient area*, the equipment shall be either
powered by an isolation transformer or connected via
Operation Before Printing .................................................................................9
WARNING an additional protective earth terminal to system

ground unless it is certified according to Standard
Loading an Ink Ribbon Cartridge ..................................................... 9
Loading Paper ................................................................................. 12
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to IEC60601-1.
rain or moisture. Selecting the Input Signal ............................................................... 14
* Patient Area
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. Refer Making Full-Size Image Printouts .................................................17
m
servicing to qualified personnel only. 83 Making Printouts with the Desired User Set Number ..................... 21
1.
R
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED. Making Multiple Copies of Identical Printouts ............................... 23
Capturing Another Image While Printing ....................................... 26
For UP-51MD/51MDU/51MDP Making Variations of Printouts .....................................................28
GB
Selecting the Printer Application Mode .......................................... 29
Symbol on the products
English
About the Memory .......................................................................... 32
Making a Printout of Multiple Different Reduced Images ............. 35
This symbol indicates the equipotential For the customers in the U.S.A.
terminal which brings the various parts of When this unit is used on 220 to 240 V AC, do not Making a Printout of Identical Reduced Images ............................. 50
a system to the same potential. use the unit itself (or as it is) unless the proper Making a Printout with an Insert ..................................................... 52
measures are taken so that the leakage current does
not exceed 300µA. Making a Printout of Mirror Images ............................................... 53
This symbol is intended to alert the user
to the presence of important operating
Making Printouts With a Caption ..................................................55
3. The leakage current could increase when connected
and maintenance (servicing) instructions to other equipment. Displaying the CAPTION Menu ..................................................... 56
in the literature accompanying the 4. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
appliance. Entering a Caption ........................................................................... 57
frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause Deleting the Images Stored in Memory ........................................64
interference to other equipment. If this unit causes Setting the Function of the CLEAR Button .................................... 64
For the customers in the U.S.A.
interference (which can be determined by unplugging
This equipment has been tested and found to comply Deleting Images Stored in Memory ................................................ 66
the power cord from the unit), try these measures:
with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Relocate the unit with respect to the susceptible About the Screen Display ..............................................................68
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
equipment. Plug this unit and the susceptible
provide reasonable protection against harmful Erasing the Screen Display on the Video Monitor .......................... 68
equipment into different branch circuit. Consult your
interference when the equipment is operated in a
dealer. (According to standard EN60601-1-2 and
commercial environment. This equipment generates, Displaying the Type and Remaining Amount of the Ink Ribbon ... 69
CISPR11, Class B, Group 1)
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio Caution
communications. Operation of this equipment in a When you dispose of the unit or accessories, you must Installation and Supplied Accessories ....................................................................71
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in obey the law in the relative area or country and the
Adjustment Assembly ......................................................................................... 72
which case the user will be required to correct the regulation in the relative hospital.
interference at his own expense. Preparing the Remote Control Unit ................................................. 73
Connections ...................................................................................74
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your
For the customers in Canada Making Connections for Capturing Video Images ......................... 74
authority to operate this equipment. (for UP-51MD/51MDU) Making Connections for Viewing Images to be Printed ................. 75
This unit has been certified according to Standard CSA Making Connections to Enable Remote Control ............................ 76
This device requires shielded interface cables to comply C22.2 NO.601.1.
with FCC emission limits.
(Continued)
2 Table of Contents 3
Introduction
Table of Contents (Continued) About This Manual
This manual covers the following UP-50 series color video printers.
• UP-50
Installation and Setting Up the Printer ....................................................................77
• UP-51MD
Adjustment Compensating for the Input Signals ................................................ 78 • UP-51MDU
Matching the Video Monitor Color to the Printer Color ................. 83 • UP-51MDP
Adjusting the Printout Color ........................................................... 86
Wherever the operation or any other item differs between models, this manual
Changing the Printout Size/Printout Area ....................................... 94
clearly describes those differences.
Adjusting the Color Balance ........................................................... 98
Selecting the Operation Mode for Automatic Printing Organization of this manual
Capabilities............................................................................... 104
Adjusting the Brightness of the Printer Window Display ............. 110
Selecting Whether the Operation and Error Tones Sound ............ 112 This manual is divided into four chapters. This section explains the organization of
this manual.
Setting the Baud Rate for Computer Communication .................. 113
Selecting the Lamination Pattern .................................................. 114 Introduction
Registering a User Set ................................................................... 116 Describes the features and system configuration of the color video printer.
Operation
Others Precautions ...................................................................................120 Describes actual printing once all connections and adjustments have been made, as
Safety ............................................................................................. 120 explained in the next chapter. You will be able to make various types of printouts
after reading through this chapter.
Installation ..................................................................................... 120
On Transportation ......................................................................... 121 Installation and adjustment
Cleaning ........................................................................................ 121 Describes how to make connections and make adjustments using the menus
displayed on the video monitor and printer window display. Once all connections
Ink Ribbon and Paper ..................................................................122
and adjustments have been made, there should be no need to perform these
Specifications ...............................................................................123 operations again during normal printing operations. These operations must,
Error/Warning Messages .............................................................127 however, be performed after reinstalling, or if the picture quality degrades, or if
Error Messages .............................................................................. 127 adjustment becomes necessary because the peripheral equipment is changed. Also
covered is the use of the printer’s remote control unit (not supplied).
Warning Messages ........................................................................ 128
If the Paper Jams ........................................................................... 129 Others
Troubleshooting ...........................................................................131 Notes the precautions to be observed when using the printer, lists errors, warnings
and their handling, and explains troubleshooting. Also provided is information on
Location and Function of Parts and Controls ...........................133
the locations and functions of parts and controls, and the on-screen messages and
Main Panel .................................................................................... 133 menus used to operate the printer. Should you encounter any unfamiliar terms or
Sub Panel ....................................................................................... 134 items while reading this manual, consult the index at the end of the manual.
Rear ............................................................................................... 136
Comparing the Printer Window Display with the Video
Monitor Display ....................................................................... 137
Monitor Display ............................................................................ 138
Index ..............................................................................................140
4 Table of Contents Introduction 5

1-3
1-4
About This Manual (Continued) System Overview
The UP-50 series color video printer is designed for capturing images from video
Conventions used
equipment such as a VTR, and for printing out high resolution images in full color
(with 256 shades per color, a total of more than 16,700,000 colors in all) in high
Cross references
resolution print mode (approximately 300 dpi). You can make various types of
Throughout this manual you will find references to other sections of the manual
printouts. You can also add a caption to the printout. You can carry out ordinary
that contain related information.
printer operation by using the buttons and setup the printer interactively by picking
from displayed menus.
Important note
Note . They explain points that
Be sure to read the sections of the manual marked Note
you should be aware of to operate the printer correctly and prevent malfunctions. Printouts that can be made with the printer
Index Printout of a full-size image Printout of 16 reduced images

(page 17) (page 35)
Use the index, in addition to the table of contents, to find information you need
when using the printer.
Monitor and printer window displays

Some monitor displays and window displays illustrated in this manual may differ
slightly from the actual display. The operation of the printer, however, remains as
described in this manual.
Printout of two reduced images Printout of identical images

(page 35) (page 50)
Printout of four reduced images

(page 35) Printout with an insert (page 52)
Printout of 8 reduced images

(page 35) Printout with a caption (page 55)
SAMPLE 123
In addition to the above printouts of multiple reduced images, printout of multiple

reduced images with white borders can be made. Also, you can make a printout of
6 Introduction mirror image(s) where the image is rotated about its vertical axis. Introduction 7
Operation
System Overview (Continued) Before Printing

This section describes the following operations that must be made prior to starting
System Configuration printing after mounting the paper tray and paper cover on the printer (see
“Assembly” on page 72) and making the necessary connections (see “Connections”
The following shows an example of a printer system configuration. on page 74).
• Loading an ink ribbon cartridge (See below.)
• Loading paper (See page 12.)
• Selecting the input signal (See page 14.)
Once the above operations have been completed, there should be no need to repeat
them during routine printing. Perform them only when absolutely necessary.
Notes
Video source • You can replace the ink ribbon cartridge or load paper regardless of whether the
Provides the video input for
printing. Connect a video power is on or off. However, turning off the power will cause the image stored in
source such as a video the memory to be lost.
recorder, a video disk player
or the like. Video monitor • Use the ink ribbon and paper contained in the same package as a pair. Before
Displays the images received attempting to load an ink ribbon cartridge or paper, make sure that the
from the video source (source
image) and the image to be combination of the ink ribbon and paper is compatible.
printed (memory image). Also • Use only ink ribbon and paper designed for use with this printer. Failing to do so
displays the printer menus and
messages. is likely to result in malfunctions. (See “Ink Ribbon and Paper” on page 122.)
When the printer power switch
is set to off, you can view the
image from the video source.
Loading an Ink Ribbon Cartridge
To make printouts, an ink ribbon cartridge (an ink ribbon holder which has been
loaded with an ink ribbon) and paper must be loaded.
Load an ink ribbon into the supplied ink ribbon holder, then load the ink ribbon
cartridge into the printer’s ribbon compartment.
Notes
• When you use the printer for the first time, the thermal head may be out of
Color video printer position. Before attempting to use the ink ribbon cartridge, turn on the power so
MEMORY SOURCE/ CAPTURE PRINT
that the thermal head is placed at the correct position.
PAGE MEMORY
POWER
• When transporting the printer, remove the ink ribbon cartridge.
• Do not throw away the supplied ink ribbon holder even if the ink ribbon is used
ALARM PRINT
up. The ink ribbon holder is reusable even though the ink ribbon is not reusable.
• When you use the UPC-510 Color Printing Pack, 200 sheets of printouts can be
printed for one ink ribbon roll. Even if you finish one pack of paper containing
100 sheets, do not throw away the ink ribbon. You can use the ink ribbon for
another pack of papers.
• Once an ink ribbon has been completely used up, replace it. An ink ribbon is not
reusable.
A
B
C
• Do not rewind the ink ribbon for reuse.
• Do not touch the ink ribbon or place it in a dusty location. Finger prints or dust
on the ink ribbon will result in imperfect printing or malfunction of the head.
Foot switch (not supplied)
• Use the ink ribbon and paper supplied only for the initial operation check of
allows you to operate the
Remote control unit (not
the printer.
printer remotely.
supplied) allows you to operate
the printer remotely.
8 Introduction Operation 9
1-5
1-6
Before Printing (Continued)
1 Open the front panel by pulling the front panel top toward you. 4 Load the new ink ribbon into the ink ribbon holder.
Spool holding the ink ribbon
Start position mark
2 Remove the ink ribbon cartridge by pressing the EJECT button. Ink ribbon
holder
The ink ribbon cartridge pops out.
When you use the printer for the first time, this operation is not required. 1 Load the spool holding 2 Fit the other spool into 3 Wind the spools of the ink
the ink ribbon into the the right-hand part of the ribbon as illustrated until a
left-hand part of the holder. start position marker
holder. appears.
5 Remove any slack from the ink ribbon.

If the ribbon is left slack, it may be damaged when inserted.
Start position marker
Wind the spools alternately

until the start position marker
Note faces upward.
Never put your hand into the ink ribbon compartment. The thermal head
becomes very hot. You may burn yourself if you touch it.
6 Insert the ink ribbon cartridge firmly until it clicks.
Confirm that the ink ribbon cartridge is surely inserted.
If the ink ribbon cartridge stops midway, stop inserting it. You may use the
wrong ink ribbon holder. Be sure to use the ink ribbon holder that is designed
for this printer.
When the ink ribbon cartridge cannot be ejected

Turn the power off, then back on again. Then, after a while, press the EJECT
button.
Note
When the ink ribbon cartridge cannot be inserted
Turning off the power will cause the image stored in the memory to be lost. In
Turn the power off, then back on gain. Then, insert the ink ribbon cartridge
this case, capture the image again before printing.
again.
3
Detach the spent ink ribbon from the ink ribbon holder.
7 Close the front panel.
1 Remove the spool 2 Remove the other spool.

holding the ink ribbon.
10 Operation Operation 11
Notes 3 Place the paper in the paper tray so that the printing surface faces down with
When storing ink ribbon cartridge: the protection sheet.
• Avoid placing the ink ribbon in a location subject to:
— high temperatures Notes
— high humidity • The paper tray holds up to about 100 sheets of paper. When adding paper to a
— excessive dust partly full tray, be careful that the total number of sheets does not exceed the
— direct sunlight limit. If you exceed this limit, paper jams may occur.
• Store a partially used ink ribbon cartridge in its original packaging. • Load the paper so that it lays flat in the paper tray. If the paper is curled, it
will overflow from the paper tray and the paper may not be fed properly. Be
If your ink ribbon should tear sure to riffle the paper with the protection sheets before attempting to place
Repair the tear with transparent tape. There should be no problem with using the the paper in the paper tray. If the printing position shifts, load fewer sheets in
remaining portion of the ribbon. the paper tray.
Transparent tape
• Do not place different types of paper in the tray.
Place the paper in the
paper tray with the
printing surface facing
Turn the spools in the direction of the arrow down.
to remove any slack until the transparent
tape cannot be seen.
Protection sheet Riffle the paper
Printing with the
surface protection sheet.
Loading Paper
To load paper, follow the procedure below. Be careful not to touch the printing
surface. Set the paper securely
under the tab.
Notes Front
• You can load paper regardless of whether the power is on or off. However, 4 Slide the paper tray back into the printer until it clicks into place.
turning off the power will cause the image stored in the memory to be lost.
• Use the only paper that we recommend. Failing to do so is likely to result in
CAPTURE PRINT
malfunctions such as paper jam. Also, do not use the paper as specified for the
MEMORY SOURCE/
PAGE MEMORY
UP-5000/5100 and UP-5500 series color video printer.

(See “Ink Ribbon and Paper” on page 122.)
1 Open the front panel by pulling the front panel top towards you.
2 Push the paper tray.

The paper tray pops out. 5 Close the front panel.
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
Notes
When handling the paper
Do not touch the printing surface. Dust or finger prints are likely to cause
unsatisfactory printing or malfunction of the head. Hold the paper by the printing
surface protection sheet.
When storing the paper
• Avoid storing the paper in a location subject to:
— high temperatures
— high humidity
— excessive dust
— direct sunlight
• Use the original package for storing unused paper.
1-7
1-8
Selecting the Input Signal 3 Select the desired input signal.

Press the INPUT SELECT button repeatedly until the color of the desired input
signal turns green on the monitor or until the desired input signal is spelled out
Before printing, select the input signal (the input connector to which the signal to on the printer window display.
be printed is being input) —VIDEO, S-VIDEO, or RGB. Once you have selected Each time you press the INPUT SELECT button, the input signal changes in
the input signal, this setting remains effective until you select another source. the order of VIDEO c S-VIDEO c RGB c VIDEO....
The selected signal will disappear within about three seconds.
The following two methods are available to select the input signal:
• Using the INPUT SELECT button Source signal of the image to be printed Video monitor and printer window
• Using the menu display (the selected input signal is
spelled out)
Signal from video equipment connected to V c VIDEO
Selecting the input signal by using the INPUT SELECT button the VIDEO INPUT connector
Signal from video equipment connected to SV c S VIDEO
the S-VIDEO INPUT connector
1 2,3 Signal from video equipment connected to R c RGB
the RGB/SYNC INPUT connectors
PAGE MEMORY
POWER
To confirm the currently selected input signal
Press the INPUT SELECT button. The currently selected input signal appears in
ALARM PRINT
green on the video monitor and is spelled out in the printer window display for
about 3 seconds.
Note
If you press the INPUT SELECT button when the memory image (the image stored
1 Turn on the video monitor and the printer. in memory) is displayed, the memory image will be replaced with the source image
The following appears once the printer is ready to operate. (the image sent from the source equipment).
Video monitor screen
Printer window display
Q1 A 1 S
Q1 A 1 S
2 Press the INPUT SELECT button.

The currently selected input signal appears. The selected signal is lit in green
on the video monitor screen and spelled out in the printer window display.
If you do not perform any operation after you press the INPUT SELECT
button, the currently set item appears for about 3 seconds, after which it
disappears.
I NPUT S E L :
V I DEO / s v / r
The currently selected input

INPUT SEL : VIDEO/SV/R signal is spelled out.
The currently selected input signal

is lit in green and is spelled out.
Before Printing (Continued) Making Full-Size Image Printouts
Selecting the input signal on the menu This section explains how to make a full-size image printout. The operations
described here constitute the basic procedure for making a printout.
1 3
Before making a full-size image printout
POWER
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
• All connections should have already been made. (See page 74.)
• Ensure that the appropriate ink ribbon/paper set is being used and that they are
correctly loaded. (See pages 9, 12 and 122.)
ALARM PRINT
• Select the input signal to be used to make a printout. (See page 14.)
• Set the printer to capture one full-size image into memory. (See page 36.)
• Select the appropriate memory page. (See page 38.)
• Confirm the printout color quality (using, for example, the LOAD COLOR
2,5 4 number) (See page 86.)
1 Turn on the video monitor and the printer.

3 RIBBON REMAIN button
1 SOURCE/MEMORY button 4 MEMORY FRM/FLD button
2 Press the INPUT SETUP button.
The INPUT SETUP menu appears. MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
POWER
INPUT SETUP COLOR : 200

/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
INPUT SEL : VIDEO / SV / R ALARM PRINT
HUE : 0
COLOR : 0
GAIN : 0 I NPUT S E T UP
OFFSET : 0
AGC : OFF / ON / c / l / p / IN/ o /
DISPLAY button
Q1 A 1 S
1 Turn on the video monitor and the printer.
3 Select INPUT SEL by pressing the F or f button.
2 Start the video source to display the source image on the video monitor.
This operation is done using the controls of the video equipment acting as the
INPUT SEL : VIDEO / SV / R source.
HUE : 0
COLOR : 0
GAIN : 0 I NPUT S E L : Video monitor screen
OFFSET : 0
AGC : OFF / ON V I DEO / s v / r
Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S INPUT SEL appears.
Position the cursor at INPUT SEL by Q1 A 1 S

pressing the F or f button.
4 Select the desired input signal by pressing the G or g button. Q1 A 1 S

INPUT SEL : VIDEO / SV / R
HUE : 0
Shows that the image from the source equipment
COLOR : 0 is displayed on the screen.
GAIN : 0 I NPUT S E L :
OFFSET : 0
AGC : OFF / ON V I DEO / s v / r
Continue to the next page c
Display the spelled-out input signal by pressing
Q1 A 1 S
the G or g button.
Switch the desired input signal to green by

pressing the G or g button. The selected input
signal turns green and is spelled out.
5 Press the INPUT SETUP button.

16 Operation The regular screen appears. Operation 17
1-9
1-10
Making Full-Size Image Printouts (Continued)
3 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant when the image you want to print 4 Press the PRINT button.
appears on the screen. The printout pops out on the paper cover.
The image is captured into memory. The memory image is displayed on the The printing time depends on the type of paper and printer settings.
screen. Which image appears after this, the source image or the memory image,
depends on the setting made with the FUNCTION SETUP function of the
printer. (See page 42.)
Q1 A 1 M
Blinks while printing

Q1 A 1 M
Q1 A 1 M
Changes as follows during printing:
Start printing t yellow t magenta t cyan
Q1 A 1 M t printing ends
The color which is currently being printed is
displayed. This indication changes as printing
progress.
Shows that the image captured in
memory is displayed on the monitor.
Notes
If the captured image is blurred • Do not turn off the power during printing.
A quickly moving image may be blurred when captured. Should this occur, If you do so, paper may not be ejected and may jam in the printer.
change the memory mode setting to FIELD, then print it again. Although the • Do not pull the paper from the paper cover until printing has been completed.
blur should be eliminated, the ultimate print quality will be slightly degraded. • Do not leave more than 10 sheets of printouts on the paper cover. Doing so may
Select the FIELD mode by pressing the MEMORY FRM/FLD button. (See cause a paper jam.
“Selecting the memory mode” on page 33.) • You can not change the printer application mode or settings on the WINDOW
SETUP menu during printing.
Notes
• Usually, it is recommended that you make printouts in FRAME mode. To To stop printing
confirm the memory mode setting, press the MEMORY FRM/FLD button. When you make one printout, you can not stop printing midway. Wait until a
The currently selected memory mode appears lit in green on the video printout pops out on the paper cover.
monitor and spelled out in the printer window display for about three When you make multiple copies, reset the printout quantity to 1 while the first
seconds, then disappears. copy is being printed. (See “Making Multiple Copies of Identical Printouts” on
• You can change the memory mode only when selecting 1 (full-size image), 2 page 23.)
(two-reduced images) or 4 (four-reduced images).
• The number of usable memory pages depends on the selected memory mode. If the printer does not print
(See page 38.) The printer will fail to print in the following cases:
• While an error message is displayed on the video monitor screen and printer
To change the image captured in memory window display.
1 To display the source image when the memory image is displayed on the — Proceed as described in “Error/Warning Messages” on page 127.
screen, press the SOURCE/MEMORY button . • When an image has not been stored in memory.
2 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to print — Image data stored in memory is lost if you turn off the power. Capture the
appears. image into memory again, then press the PRINT button.
The previous image is replaced with the new one.

To make a printout at high speed
Note Set PRN SPEED to HIGH in the PRINTER SETUP menu. (See page 30.)
If you turn off the power, the image stored in memory will be lost. Should this
happen, capture the image into memory again after turning on the power. If no
image is stored in memory, the printer will not print even if you press the
PRINT button.
When you want to see an image that is hidden below a screen

message Making Printouts with the Desired User Set Number
You can erase the screen message (such as Q1, A and so on) from the video
monitor screen by pressing the DISPLAY button. The screen message disappears. You can register all the printer settings as a user settings. The printer allows you to
To display a screen message, press the DISPLAY button again. (See “Erasing the register three sets of settings as User Set 1, 2 and 3. (See “Registering a User Set”
Screen Display on the Video Monitor” on page 68.) You can also erase the on page 116.) By selecting a desired user set number, the printer functions
information about ink ribbon and paper by pressing the RIBBON REMAIN button. according to the corresponding settings. You can change a part of the selected user
(See “Displaying the Type and Remaining Amount of the Ink Ribbon” on page 69.) settings and make printouts.
If a black line appears on the printout Note

Sometimes, a black line appears on the printout, although it does not appear on the If you change the currently selected user set to another one, the image stored in
video monitor. This black line can be eliminated from the printout. (See “Changing memory pages will be cleared.
the Printout Size/Printout Area” page 94.)
6 3,4
If the color quality of printouts is not satisfactory 1 7 5
You can obtain the satisfactory color quality of printout by compensating for the
input signal and/or adjust the color quality of the printouts. (See “Compensating for MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
POWER
the Input Signals” on page 78, and “Adjusting the Printout Color”on page 86.)
Notes
ALARM PRINT
When storing your printouts:

• Avoid storing the printout in a location subject to high temperatures, high
humidity, excessive dust or direct sunlight.
• Do not stick tape on a printout. Also, avoid leaving a plastic eraser on a printout
or placing a printout in contact with materials which contain plasticizer (under a
desk mat, for example). 1 Turn on the video monitor and printer.
• Do not allow alcohol or other volatile organic solvents to come into contact with
the printouts. 2 Start the video source to display the source image on the video monitor.
source.
3 Press the LOAD USER button.

The currently selected user setting appears.
L OAD US ER
1 / – / – [ EX EC ]
The currently selected user set

LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] number is displayed.
The currently selected user set number

is lit in green.

1-11
1-12
4 Select the user set number.

Making Multiple Copies of Identical Printouts
Press the LOAD USER button repeatedly until the desired user set turns green
on the video monitor or until the desired user set is displayed on the printer
window display. You can make up to 9 copies of identical printouts.
Each time you press the LOAD USER button, the user set number changes in
the order of 1 c 2 c 3 c 1.... Setting the printout quantity
The selected user set number will disappear within about three seconds.
The following two methods are available to set the number of printouts.
• Using the PRINT QTY button. However, you cannot use the button to decrease
the number of printouts.
• Using the menu
L OAD US ER :
You can change the designated number of copies before printing or any time
– / – / 3 [ EX EC ] during printing.
Display the desired user set number. To set the printout quantity by using the PRINT QTY button
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
Switch the desired user set number

to green.
1,2
5 Press the EXEC button.

The user set selected in step 4 is executed.
While the selected user set is being executed, the following message appears.
When the user name is registered, the user name appears.
1 Press the PRINT QTY button.

USER PRESET - 3 LOADING
The following screen appears.
USER 3 If you do not perform any operation after you press the PRINT QTY button,
the currently set number of copies appears for about 3 seconds, after which it
PLEASE WAIT
P RE SE T - 3 L OAD I NG disappears.
USER 3
P R I NT QT Y :
1[1-9]
6 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to print appears
on the screen. PRINT QTY. :1 [1~9]
The image is captured into memory.
7 Press the PRINT button. Currently selected number of copies
The printer makes printouts according to the user set selected in step 4.
2 Press the PRINT QTY button until the desired number appears. 3 Select PRINT QTY by pressing the F or f button.
Repeatedly pressing the PRINT QTY button increases the number up to a PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200
maximum of 9. Or repeatedly pressing the g button also increases the number / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
up to a maximum of 9. INTERVAL : OFF / ON
GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H
PRN SPEED : / HIGH P R I NT QT Y :
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] 1[1-9]
SYSTEM : PRESS [ > ]
FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ]
P R I NT QT Y : C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S PRINT QTY appears.
3[1-9]
Position the cursor at PRINT QTY by
pressing the F or fbutton.
PRINT QTY. :3 [1~9]
4 Select the desired number of copies by pressing the G or g button.

Press the PRINT QTY button or g button until the desired number appears.
When you want to Button
To decrease the number of copies Increase the quantity. g
While the screen which appears in step 1 is being displayed, press the G button. Decrease the quantity. G
Each time you press the G button, the number decreases and stops at 1.
5 Press the MENU button.
Setting the printout quantity using the menu The regular screen appears.
If the paper runs out during printing

1,5
3 Load the paper into the paper tray and press the PRINT button.
However, the printout quantity is reset to the original quantity requested when
printing is stopped.
For example, if the printout quantity is set to 5, and the paper runs out when three
copies are printed, the printout quantity is reset to 5. If you want to print only the
remaining copies, set the printout quantity to 2 after loading the paper. (See
“Loading Paper” on page 12.)
2,4

The menu previously opened appears.
2 Select PRN by pressing the G or g button.

The PRINTER SETUP menu appears.
PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200

PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH P R I NT ER S E T UP
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] / c / l / PRN / i / o /
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters by
Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button.
Switch PRN to green by pressing

the G or g button.
1-13
1-14
Note
Capturing Another Image While Printing Another image cannot be stored in a memory page in which an image has
already been queued for printing. In such a case, the “PLEASE WAIT
While the printer is printing, you can cue printing by capturing another image into PRINTING MEMORY” appears.
another memory page to be printed once the printer becomes free. The usable
memory pages depend on the type of printouts and settings. (See page 38.) 4 To queue another memory page, repeat steps 1, 2 and 3.
1 23
PAGE MEMORY
POWER
ALARM PRINT
1 Select the desired memory page by pressing the MEMORY PAGE button.
Pressing the MEMORY PAGE button switches the memory page.
Q1 B 1 S
The currently selected memory page.

Q1 B 1 S
The available memory pages appear in white.
on the screen.
3 Press the PRINT button.

The image captured in step 2 is queued. The image is printed as soon as all
previous printing jobs have been completed.
Q1 B 1 S
Q1 B 1 S
Memory page whose image has been queued for printing (blinks
white on the video monitor)
The memory page display returns to white on the video monitor
once printing has been completed.
Making Variations of Printouts
You can store various kinds of images in memory and make variations of printouts
using the images captured in memory. Selecting the Printer Application Mode
Variations of printouts that the printer can produce The unit allows you to make printouts of a full-size image, two reduced images,
The following variations of printout of the images stored in memory can be made. four reduced images, eight reduced images and 16 reduced images.
Also by setting the printer application mode to either STANDARD or
Printout of a full-size Printout of two reduced Printout of four reduced DUPLICATE, you can make a printout of different multiple images or identical
image images images multiple images.
When you use the printer for the first time, the STANDARD application mode for
ABC
123
ABC 1 2 3 full-size image printouts is selected.
ABC 4 5 6 XYZ Select the application mode according to what kind of printouts you want to make.
Note
Printout of eight Printout of 16 Printout of identical Changing the application mode results in clearing images stored in all of the
reduced images reduced images images a)
memory pages.
4 5 6 EFG
KLM XYZ
ABC 1 2 3
H I J 789
ABC ABC
ABC ABC 3,5,7,9
1,11
Printout with an insert
123
ABC
a) You can make printouts of two-, four-, eight or 16 identical reduced images. 6,10
2,4,8
You can make a printouts of multiple reduced images with white borders.
Also, you can make printouts of mirror images where images stored in the memory i
are rotated about the vertical axis.
The menu previously opened appears.


PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S
Display PRN in capital letters by
pressing the G or g button.
Switch PRN to green by pressing the

G or g button.

1-15
1-16
Making Variations of Printouts (Continued)
3 Select PRN SPEED by pressing the F or f button. 6 Press the g button.

The SYSTEM SETUP menu appears.
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ] PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON LCD - CONTR : 7
GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
PRN SPEED : / HIGH PRN S P E ED : BEEP : OFF / ON
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON APPLI. : STANDARD / S Y S T EM S E T UP
/ H I GH IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SYSTEM : PRESS [ > ] SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRN SE T UP [ > ]
FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ] USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S PRN SPEED appears.
Q1 A 1 S
Position the cursor at PRN SPEED

by pressing the F or f button. 7 Select APPLI. by pressing the F or f button.
SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200

When you use the UPC-540 Self Laminating Printing Pack, you can select the PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
finish of the printouts. (See “Selecting the Lamination Pattern” on page 114.) LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
BEEP : OFF / ON
APP L I . :
4 Select the desired PRN SPEED by pressing the G or g button.
APPLI.
IRE
: STANDARD /
: 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
S T ANDA RD /
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S APPLI. appears.
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH PRN S P E ED : Position the cursor at APPLI. by
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON pressing the F or f button.
/ H I GH
SYSTEM
FUNCTION
: PRESS [ > ]
: PRESS [ > ]
8 Select the desired application mode by pressing the G or g button.
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display the desired PRN SPEED by
Q1 A 1 S SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200
pressing the G or g button. PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
Switch the desired PRN SPEED to green by
BEEP : OFF / ON
pressing the G or g button. APPLI. : STANDARD / APP L I . :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] S T ANDA RD /
When you want to PRN SPEED USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
Make a printout at normal speed. NORMAL

Display the desired mode in capital
Q1 A 1 S
Make a printout at high speed. HIGH letters by pressing the G or g button.
Switch the desired mode to green by

5 Select SYSTEM by pressing the F or f button. pressing the G or g button.
Application mode Printout

PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200 STANDARD Printout with a full-size image, two different reduced images, four
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / different reduced images, eight different reduced images and 16
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
different reduced images
GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H DUPLICATE Printouts of a full-size image, two identical reduced images, four
PRN SPEED : / HIGH S Y S T EM :
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON identical reduced images, eight identical reduced images and 16
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE SS [ > ] identical reduced images

Q1 A 1 S
SYSTEM appears.
9 Select PRN SETUP by pressing the F or f button.
Position the cursor at SYSTEM by pressing
10 Press the g button.
the F or f button. The PRINTER SETUP menu appears.

The regular screen appears.
About the Memory Selecting the memory mode
To make printouts, it is first necessary to capture the image in memory. Note

When capturing the image, there are two ways to use the memory, one is frame You can select memory mode only when you select the full-image type of printout,
mode and the other is field mode. two-reduced image printout or four-reduced image printout.
Frame mode: A image is captured in a memory area.
Field mode: A memory area is divided into two, and images can be captured in The following two methods are available to select the memory mode:
each. A quickly moving subject can be printed with less blurring. • Using the MEMORY FRM/FLD button
A memory area in which an image is captured is called a memory page in this • Using the menu
manual.
The number of usable memory pages depends on the type of the reduced images To select the memory mode using the MEMORY FRM/FLD button
selected and on the memory mode.
For detailed information, see “Selecting the memory page” on page 38.
1,2
Note
You can select the filed mode only when you select the full-image type of printout,
two-reduced image printout or four-reduced image printout.
In frame mode
Video monitor
Printout
1 Press the MEMORY FRM/FLD button.
If you do not perform any operation after you press the MEMORY FRM/FLD
button, the currently selected memory mode appears for about 3 seconds, after
which it disappears.
Q1 A 1 S
A still subject can be printed with
high resolution.
The image displayed in the video monitor is
captured in memory page A.
In field mode
M EMORY :
Video monitor F RAME / f i e l d
Printout
The currently selected memory mode
MEMORY : FRAME/FIELD is displayed in capital letters.
The currently selected memory mode is

lit in green
Q1 A1 1 S
A quickly moving subject can
be printed with less blurring.
2 Select the desired memory mode by pressing the MEMORY FRM/FLD button.
The image displayed in the Press the MEMORY FRM/FLD button repeatedly until the color of the desired
video monitor is captured in memory turns lit green on the video monitor, or until the desired memory mode
memory page A1.
is displayed in the capital letters on the printer window display.
Each time you press the FRM/FLD button, the memory mode changes.
FRAME: We recommend that, whenever possible, you print in this mode.

FIELD: Select this mode to reduce blurring when you print a quickly moving
image.
1-17
1-18
To select the memory mode using the menu 4 Select the desired memory mode by pressing the G or g button.
LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200

1,5 / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD
3 MULTI PIX
SEPARATE
: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
: OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR M EMORY :
LAMINATION : GLOSSY /
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] f r ame / F I E L D
CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]
Display the desired memory

Q1 A 1 S
mode in capital letters by
Switch the desired memory mode to
green by pressing the G or g button.
2,4
The previously selected menu appears.
2 Select LAY by pressing the G or g button. Making a Printout of Multiple Different Reduced
The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears. Images
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / You can capture multiple images in a memory page and make a printout with those
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 reduced images. This section explains how to make a printout with multiple
SEPARATE
MIRROR
: OFF / ON
: OFF / MIRROR L A YOU T SE T UP reduced images.
/ c / L AY / p / i / o / A printout having multiple reduced images is made using the following the
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ]
CAPTION : PRESS [ > ] procedure below.
Display LAY in capital letters by • Setting the printer application mode to STANDARD (See page 31.)
Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button. • Determining the number of reduced images. (See the following page.)
• Selecting the memory page (See page 38.)
Switch LAY to green by pressing • Selecting the method to be used to capture the images in memory (See page 40.)
the G or g button.
3 Select MEMORY by pressing the F or f button.

MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR M EMORY :
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] F RAME / f i e l d
Q1 A 1 S
MEMORY appears.
Position the cursor at MEMORY by

Selecting the number of reduced images to be captured in memory To select the type of reduced images to be captured in the memory
using the menu
The following two methods are available to select the memory mode:
• Using the MULTI PICTURE button 1,5
• Using the menu 3
To select the desired type of reduced images to be captured in
memory using the MULTI PICTURE button
1,2
2,4

1 Press the MULTI PICTURE button.
2 Select LAY by pressing the G or g button.
If you do not perform any operation after you press the MULTI PICTURE The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
button, the current setting appears for about 3 seconds, after which it LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200
disappears. / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR L A YOU T SE T UP
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] / c / L AY / p / i / o /
MU L T I PIX :
1 / – / – / – / –– Q1 A 1 S
Display LAY in capital letters by
The currently selected type of reduced images Switch LAY to green by pressing the G
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
to be captured in memory is displayed. or g button.
The currently selected type of reduced images

to be captured in memory is lit in green. 3 Select MULTI PIX by pressing the F or f button.
2 Select the type of reduced images to be captured in memory by pressing the LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200
MULTI PICTURE button. / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
Press the MULTI PICTURE button repeatedly until the color of the type of MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
reduced images to be captured in memory turns green on the video monitor, or MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR MU L T I PIX :
until the type of reduced images to be captured in the memory is displayed on LAMINATION : GLOSSY
/
1 / – / – / – / ––
the printer window display. CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]
Each time you press the MULTI PICTURE button, the type of reduced-image Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S
printout changes in order 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 1.... MULTI PIX appears.
Position the cursor at MULTI PIX

Type Number of reduced images by pressing the F or f button.
1 1 (Full-size image)
2 2 (Two reduced images) Continue to the next page c
4 4 (Four reduced images)
8 8 (Eight reduced images)
16 16 (16 reduced images)
The screen is reset to the regular screen after a few seconds.

1-19
1-20
4 Select the type of reduced images to be captured in memory by pressing the G To select the memory page
or g button.
MEMORY PAGE button
MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 POWER
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR MU L T I PIX :
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] – / 4 / – / – / –– ALARM PRINT
Display the type of reduced images

Q1 A 1 S to be captured in memory by
pressing the G or g button
Switch the type of reduced images to
be captured in memory to green by
pressing the G or g button. Press the MEMORY PAGE button.

Selecting the memory page

Q1 A S
The memory page used depends on the type of reduced images to be captured in
memory and on the memory mode.
Q1 A 1 S
UP-50/51MD/51MDP
Usable memory page Press the MEMORY PAGE button
Priter application mode Type of reduced images to
repeatedly until the desired memory
be captured in memory FRAME FIELD page appears.
STANDARD Full image A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1,
D2, E1, E2, F1, F2, G1, G2,
H1, H2
Two reduced images A, B, C, D A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1,
D2
Four reduced images A, B A1, A2, B1, B2
Eight reduced images A, B, C, D —
16 reduced images A, B —
DUPLICATE All types (1, 2, 4, 8 and 16) A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1,
D2, E1, E2, F1, F2, G1, G2,
H1, H2
UP-51MDU
Priter application mode Type of reduced images to Usable memory page
be captured in memory FRAME FIELD
STANDARD Full image A, B, C, D A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1,
D2
Two reduced images A, B A1, A2, B1, B2
Four reduced images A A1, A2
Eight reduced images A, B —
16 reduced images A —
DUPLICATE All types (1, 2, 4, 8 and 16) A, B, C, D A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1,
D2
Selecting the method to be used to capture the images 3 Select INTERVAL by pressing the F or f button.
You can select the method to be used to capture the images by using the PRINTER / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
SETUP menu and FUNCTION SETUP menu. PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
• Capturing only the image currently displayed on the video monitor screen or GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H
PRN SPEED : / HIGH I N T ERV A L :
capturing images sequentially to all reduced-image positions of a memory page MOTION CHK : OFF / ON
at regular intervals. LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] OF F / o n
• Deciding which image displays on the video monitor screen after capturing an FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ]
image, a memory image or a source image. Q1 A 1 S INTERVAL appears.
Position the cursor at INTERVAL by

3,5,7 pressing the F or f button.
1,9 4 Select the desired method for capturing images by pressing the G or g button.
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH I N T ERV A L :
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] o f f / ON
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display the setting in capital letters by
Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button
2,4,8 6 Switch the desired setting to green by

1 Press the MENU button. When you want to Setting

The previously selected menu appears. Capture only the image currently displayed on the video OFF
monitor screen by pressing the CAPTURE button.
2 Select PRN by pressing the G or g button. Capture images sequentially to all positions of a memory ON
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears. page at regular intervals by pressing the CAPTURE button.
PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200 5 Select FUNCTION by pressing the F or f button.

PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH P R I NT ER S E T UP PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] / c / l / PRN / i / o / GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H
PRN SPEED : / HIGH F UNCT I ON :
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE SS [ > ]
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters by SYSTEM : PRESS [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button. FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S
FUNCTION appears.
Switch PRN to green by pressing the
G or g button.
Position the cursor at FUNCTION
by pressing the F or f button.
When you select the type of reduced images to be captured, go to step 3.
When you select the type of full image to be captured, go to step 5 6 Press the g button.
The FUNCTION SETUP menu appears.
FUNCTION SETUP COLOR : 200

PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
AUTO LIVE : OFF / ON
IMMED. CAP. : OFF / ON
RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT /
RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + F UNCT I ON S E TUP
RM3B FUNC : / BACK - SP /
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / PRN S E T UP [ > ]
RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE /
CLEAR : ALL /
Q1 A 1 S Continue to the next page c

1-21
40 Operation
Operation 41
1-22
7 Select AUTO LIVE by pressing the F or f button. Making a Printout with multiple reduced images
PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ] This subsection explains how to make printouts of multiple reduced images taking,
IMMED. CAP. : OFF / ON as an example, the making of a printout of four reduced images.
RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + AU TO L I V E :
OF F / o n Before making the printout of four reduced images
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC /
RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE / • Confirm the printout color quality (using, for example, the LOAD COLOR
CLEAR : ALL /
number). (See page 86.)
Q1 A 1 S
AUTO LIVE appears. • Select the type of four-reduced image to be captured in memory. (See page 36.)
Position the cursor at AUTO LIVE by pressing
the F or f button.
• Set the method to be used to capture images in the memory page and select
which image will appear after the image has been captured into memory, the
8 Select which image appears on the video monitor after the image is captured, memory image or the source image. (See page 40.)
• Select whether the white borders are to be added. (See page 49.)
by pressing the G or g button.
You can select whether the white borders are added before or after capturing the
four reduced images in the memory.
32 MEMORY FRM/FLD button
RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + AU TO L I V E :
o f f / ON
PAGE MEMORY
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / POWER

CLEAR : ALL /
Q1 A 1 S ALARM PRINT
Display the setting in capital letters by

pressing the G or g button
Switch the desired setting to green by
MOTION CHECK button
When Setting F, f, G and g buttons
The image captured in memory appears just after the OFF

printer captures the image, and the memory image remains
on the video monitor screen.
1 Start the video source.
The image captured in memory appears just after the printer ON
captures the image, then after a few seconds, the source source.
memory appears, whenever you press the CAPTURE button. The memory page in which the
Blinks green to indicate that an four reduced images are to be
image will be captured here. captured.
9 Press the MENU button. Indicate that an
The regular screen appears. image will be
captured here.
To return to the PRINTER SETUP menu * *

In step 9, position the cursor at PRN SETUP and press the g button.
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears again. * *
Q1 A 4F : 1 S
Q1 A 4F : 1 S
Indicates that the

Type of multiple reduced images to be captured
images from a
F: Indicates that white borders are to be attached
piece of video
around the images.
equipment are
When white borders are attached, 4F is displayed.
displayed on the
When white borders are not attached, 4 is
screen.
displayed.
1: Indicate that an image will be captured here.

2 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to print appears 1 Select the third position where the image which you want to replace is
on the screen. located by pressing the F, f, G or g button.
The image has been captured in the location indicated by the green blinking Pressing the F, f, G or g button moves the cursor one position by one
star on the video monitor screen or the position number displayed on the position vertically or horizontally.
printer window display in step 1. The green blinking star (referred to as the
cursor) on the monitor video moves to the next position and the number on the
printer window display advances by 1.
* *
* * * *
Q1 A 4F : 3 S
Press the F, f, G or g button
* *
Q1 A 4F : 2 S Q1 A 4F : 3 S until a 3 appears.
The number advances by 1. Press the F, f, G or g button until the

Q1 A 4F : 2 S third cursor blinks green.
The blinking cursor moves to the next 2 Display the source image on the video monitor.
position.
3 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to print
At this time, the image captured in memory is displayed on the video monitor appears.
screen. However, the image to be displayed after a few seconds depends on the The previously stored image is replaced with the newly stored image.
setting of AUTO LIVE in the FUNCTION SETUP menu. (See page 42.)
When INTERVAL in the PRINTER SETUP menu is set to ON, the image is To skip a previously captured image
automatically captured sequentially to four positions at regular intervals. In When an image has already been captured, the previously captured image can
this case, go to step 5. be replaced by pressing the CAPTURE button.
When the source image is displayed at the position where the next image is to Skip images that you want to keep by pressing the F, f, G or g button.
be captured, go to step 4.
3 Press the SOURCE/MEMORY button. The four reduced images are printed on one sheet of paper.
The source image appears on the video monitor screen. Whether white borders are attached depends on the setting of SEPARATE in
the LAYOUT SETUP menu. (See page 49.)
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have captured four images when the memory
image remains on the video monitor screen.
Repeat step 2 until you have captured four images when the source image
appears on the video monitor screen at the next position where the image is to
be captured.
To replace a captured image

When INTERVAL is set to OFF in the PRINTER SETUP menu, you can
replace a captured image.
Example: When you want to change the image stored in the third position.
1-23
1-24
If the printout is blurred To set the MOTION CHECK function using the MOTION CHECK button
When you make a printout of a full image, or two or four reduced images captured
in memory in FRAME mode, the images on a printout may be blurred. Should this
occur, change the memory mode setting to FIELD, then print it again. Although the
blur should be eliminated, the ultimate print quality will be slightly degraded.
Select the FIELD mode by pressing the MEMORY FRM/FLD button. (See
“Selecting the memory mode” on page 33.)
* *
M EMORY :
1,2
* *
f r a me / F I E L D
1 Press the MOTION CHECK button.
Display FIELD in capital letters. The following screen appears.
MEMORY : FRAME/FIELD
If you do not perform any operation after you press the MOTION CHECK
Switch FIELD to green.
button,the currently selected setting appears for about 3 seconds, after whichit
disappears.
Notes
• This function is available only when one of either full image, or two or four
reduced images is selected to be captured in memory.
• Usually, it is recommended that you make printouts in FRAME mode. To MOT I ON CHK :
confirm the memory mode setting, press the MEMORY FRM/FLD button. The OF F / o n
currently selected memory mode appears for about three seconds, then
disappears. The currently selected setting is
MOTION CHK OFF/ON displayed in capital letters.
To confirm whether the captured images are blurred on the video The currently selected setting is lit in
monitor green
You can check whether the full image, or the two or four reduced images captured 2 Select the desired setting by pressing the MOTION CHECK button.
in memory are blurred on the video monitor. Press the MOTION CHECK button repeatedly until the color of the desired
When you select full image: You can check whether the captured image is blurred setting turns green on the video monitor, or until the desired setting is displayed
by displaying the memory image on the video monitor. in capital letters on the printer window display.
When you select two or four reduced images to be captured: Press the Each time you press the MOTION CHECK button, the setting changes.
MOTION CHECK button to set the MOTION CHECK function to ON. You can
check whether the reduced images captured in memory are blurred on the video When you want to Setting
monitor. In this case, the image on the video monitor will be slightly degraded. See the letters or fine images on the video monitor. OFF
Confirm whether the two or four reduced images ON
Note captured in the memory are blurred
The MOTION CHECK function is available only for the images displayed on the
video monitor. To eliminate blur from the printout, change the memory mode
setting to FIELD. (See “If the printout is blurred” on this page.) The screen is reset to the regular screen after a few seconds.
Note
Even if you change the setting of the MOTION CHECK function, the printout
quality will not be affected.
To select the setting using the menu Making a printout with white borders
1,5 The unit allows you to decide whether or not the images are printed with white
3 borders.
1,5
3
2,4
2,4
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / The previously selected menu appears.
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH P R I NT ER S E T UP 2 Select LAY by pressing the G or g button.
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ] LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters by / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
Q1 A 1 S MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD
pressing the G or g button. MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
Switch PRN to green by pressing the G or g button. MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR L A YOU T SE T UP
/ c / L AY / p / i / o /
3 Select MOTION CHK by pressing the F or f button.
WINDOW
CAPTION
: PRESS [ > ]
: PRESS [ > ]

/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / Q1 A 1 S
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ] pressing the G or g button.
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH MOT I ON CHK : Switch LAY to green by pressing
MOTION CHK : OFF / ON the G or g button.
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] OF F / o n
SYSTEM
FUNCTION
: PRESS [ > ]
: PRESS [ > ]
Press the F or f button until MOTION CHK
3 Select SEPARATE by pressing the F or f button.
Q1 A 1 S appears.
Position the cursor at MOTION CHK by pressing the F or f button. MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
4 Select the desired setting by pressing the G or g button. SEPARATE
MIRROR
: OFF / ON
: OFF / MIRROR S E P ARA T E :
PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200 WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] OF F / o n
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
Press the F or f button until SEPARATE
Q1 A 1 S
PRN SPEED : / HIGH MOT I ON CHK : appears.
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] o f f / ON Position the cursor at SEPARATE by
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display the setting in capital letters by Continue to the next page c
Switch the desired setting to green by pressing the G or g button.

1-25
48 Operation The regular screen appears. Operation 49

1-26
4 Select whether the images are printed with or without white borders by 1 Start the video source.
pressing the G or g button. This operation is done using the controls of the video equipment acting as the
source.
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR S E P ARA T E :
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] o f f / ON
Q1 A DUP 4 S
Display the setting in capital letters by
Q1 A DUP 4 S
Switch the desired setting to green
Indicates that the printer is set to the DUPLICATE

When you want to Setting application mode where four identical reduced
Print the images without white borders. OFF images are printed on one sheet of paper.
Print the images with white borders. ON

5 Press the MENU button. on the screen.
The regular screen appears. The image captured in the memory appears on the whole screen. (The image is
displayed in full size.)
Making a Printout of Identical Reduced Images To change the image in memory

1 Start the video source.
2 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to print
You can make a printout of identical reduced images. appears.
The previously captured image is replaced with the newly captured image.
Before making the printout of identical reduced images
• Set the printer application mode to DUPLICATE. (See page 31.) 3 Press the PRINT button.
• Select the desired type of the identical reduced images to be captured in memory. The identical reduced images are printed on one sheet of paper.
(See page 36.)
• Select whether the white borders are to be added. (See page 49.)
You can select whether white borders are added before or after capturing the four
reduced images in memory.
23
PAGE MEMORY
POWER
ALARM PRINT
Making a Printout with an Insert 4 Press the MULTI PICTURE button to reset the printer to the type of full-size
image to be captured.
The full-size image with an insert appears on the video monitor.
You can make printouts with an insert which is a reduced image.
Either eight or 16 reduced images to be captured are used for deciding the image to 5 Press the PRINT button.
be inserted onto the full image. However, the position and the size of the reduced The image with an insert is printed.
image to be inserted are those for the four reduced images.
5 Making a Printout of Mirror Images

2,4
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT You can set the printer so that images captured in the memory are rotated about
POWER
the vertical axis (mirror images) and make a printout of these mirror images.
ALARM PRINT
1,5
3
3
1 Display the full-size image stored in memory by pressing the SOURCE/
MEMORY button. Or capture the full-size image in memory. (Follow steps 1
to 3 of “Making Full-Size Image Printouts” on page 17.)
2 Press the MULTI PICTURE button repeatedly until either the 8 or 16 reduced- 2,4
image type (without white borders and in STANDARD printer application
mode) is selected.
(See “Selecting the number of reduced images to be captured in memory” on 1 Press the MENU button.
page 36.) The previously selected menu appears.
3 Capture the image to be inserted. 2 Select LAY by pressing the G or g button.

1 Select the position where the reduced image is to be inserted by pressing The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
the G, g, F or f button.
Example: To insert the image in the lower-left position / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
When you select 8 in step 2 When you select 16 in step 2 SEPARATE : OFF / ON
A B C A B C A B C A B C WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] / c / L AY / p / i / o /
XYZ XYZ CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S Display LAY in capital letters by

Q1 A 8:3 Q1 A 8:4 Q1 A 16:05 Q1 A 16:06
Position the cursor Image which appears Position the cursor The image which Switch LAY to green by pressing
(blinking) to this after the CAPTURE (blinking) at this position appears after the the G or g button.
position by pressing button is pressed in by pressing the G, g, F CAPTURE button is
the G, g, F or f step 2. or f button. pressed in step 2. Continue to the next page c
button.
2 Press the CAPTURE button at the instant the image you want to insert
appears.
The image to be inserted is captured at the position selected in step 1.
1-27
1-28
Making Variations of Printouts (Continued) Making Printouts With a Caption
3 Select MIRROR by pressing the F or f button. A caption, such as data or comments, can be added to a printout below the image.
You can input up to 80 characters. When using a computer via the RS-232C
LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200 interface, you can input up to 160 characters on two lines from the computer.
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
About the CAPTION menu
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR M I RROR : A caption is entered from the CAPTION menu. You can input a caption in any
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] OF F / m i r r o r printer application mode and make a printout with that caption.
A brief explanation of each item of the CAPTION menu is given below.
Q1 A 1 S MIRROR appears. Character display area
The cursor lit in green indicates ON: displayed when printing with a
Position the cursor at MIRROR by the position where a character can caption.
pressing the F or f button. be entered. OFF: displayed when printing without
The entered characters are a caption (OFF is displayed as the
displayed here. factory-setting).
4 Select whether the captured images are to be rotated or not. Indicates the position
CAPTION OFF 1 where the character is Indicates the character selected in
____________________ to be input in the the character entry area.
____________________ character display
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / ____________________
MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD ____________________
area.
MULTI PIX
SEPARATE
: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
: OFF / ON
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F <A> 1
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR M I RROR : O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SHIFT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=%
LAMINATION : GLOSSY / ’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] o f f / M I RROR #$¥£@~| ^
!?&/ *INS DEL SP OFF ON EXIT
Q1 A 1 S
Display the setting in capital letters Indicates the position where the
Q1 A 1 S by pressing the G or g button. character is to be input in the
Character entry area Symbols and words character display area.
Switch the desired setting to green The character or symbol where can be used to enter a
by pressing the G or g button. the cursor is located is highlighted caption.
in green and this highlighted
character is to be entered.
When you want to Setting
Print the images in the normal direction. OFF
Rotate the images about the vertical axis. MIRROR Symbols and words can be used to enter a caption
5 Press the MENU button. Display in the
The regular screen appears. CAPTION menu Function
INS Inserts one character without erasing the highlighted character.
Note DEL Deletes a highlighted character and characters shift back by one.
Even if you set MIRROR to MIRROR, a caption entered in the CAPTION window SP Puts one space at the position of the highlighted character by erasing
will be printed in the normal direction. that character. One space is left.
OFF Selects printing without a caption.
ON Selects printing with a caption.
EXIT Returns from the CAPTION menu to the LAYOUT SETUP menu.
SHIFT Selects either capital letters or small letters.
Making Printouts With a Caption (Continued)
Displaying the CAPTION Menu Entering a Caption

Enter a caption as follows. The setting remains effective until you enter a new
The following two methods are available to display the CAPTION menu: setting - even if you turn the power off.
• Using the CAPTION INPUT button
• Using the menu Notes
• If you turn off the power of the printer without returning to the LAYOUT
SETUP menu or the regular screen after entering the characters in the CAPTION
CAPTION INPUT button
menu, the entered characters are cleared.
• During printing, you cannot enter or edit the caption in the CAPTION menu.
4 1,6
Press the CAPTION INPUT button.

The CAPTION menu appears.
CAPTION OFF
____________________
____________________
1
2,3
____________________
____________________
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SHIFT
C . OF F <A> 1 1 Press the CAPTION INPUT button.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% The CAPTION menu appears.
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
Q1 A
INS DEL SP OFF ON EXIT
1 S
2 Position the cursor (the line lit in green) at the point where you want to enter
the character in the character display area.
To display the CAPTION menu by using the LAYOUT SETUP menu To move the cursor
Position the cursor at CAPTION on the LAYOUT SETUP menu by pressing the F 1 Select the arrow corresponding to the direction in which you want to move
or f button, the press the g button. the green cursor in the character display area, by pressing the F, f, G or g
The CAPTION menu appears. button.
Each time you press the EXEC button, the cursor moves one position in the
designated direction.
1-29
1-30
Example: Move the cursor to the left by two. To select either capital letters or small letters
The cursor is currently
You can change the characters in the character entry area from the capital
positioned here (lit in green). letters to small letters or vice versa.
1 Highlight SHIFT in green by pressing the F, f, G or g button on the video
CAPTION OFF 3 monitor.
____________________ 1 Display LEFT.
____________________ When characters are displayed in capital letters in the character entry area,
____________________
____________________
SHIFT is displayed in the printer window display. When displayed in
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F < LEFT> 3 lower-case letters, shift is displayed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% 2 Press the EXEC button.
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^ Capital letters are changed to small letters, or small letters are changed to
capital letters in the character entry area.
Q1 A 1 S
The cursor is currently
positioned here (blinking). Note
1 Highlight the G button in green.
Characters already entered (displayed in the character display area) are not
2 Press the EXEC button twice. changed even if letters are changed in the character entry area.
The blinking cursor moves to m 4 Press the EXEC button.

this position.
The character selected in step 3 appears at the point where the green cursor is
CAPTION OFF 1
positioned in the character display area, after which the cursor moves to the
____________________ next position.
____________________
____________________
The cursor moves to this position.
____________________
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F < LEFT> 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% CAPTION OFF 2
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ > S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
____________________
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
____________________
____________________
Q1 A 1 S ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F <S> 2
The cursor moves to this position. O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SHIFT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% S
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
Note INS DEL SP OFF ON EXIT
The cursor moves to this position.
Q1 A 1 S
When OFF is displayed, the CAPTION input mode is set to off. Thus, you
cannot add a caption to the printouts. (See “Making printouts with a caption”
on page 63.) When you enter the wrong character in the above example
1 Select G by pressing the F, f, G or g button, then press the EXEC button.
3 Select the character you want to enter by pressing the F, f, G or g button. The cursor moves back by one and the character entered in step 3 is
highlighted in green.
Example: Enter S. 2 Select DEL by pressing the F, f, G or g button.
CAPTION OFF 1 Display S by pressing the F, f, G or g Lit in green

____________________ button.
____________________
____________________
____________________ CAPTION OFF 1 Display DEL by pressing the F,
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F <S> 1 S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
____________________
f, G or g button.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% ____________________
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ > ____________________
C . OF F < DE L > 1
#$¥£@~| ^ ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
!?&/ *INS DEL SP OFF ON EXIT O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SHIFT
Q1 A 1 S
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% S
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
The cursor moves to the top.
Highlight S in green by pressing the Q1 A 1 S
F, f, G or g button. S blinks in
green.
Highlight DEL in green by pressing the F,
f, G or g button. DEL blinks in green.
3 Press the EXEC button. Example: Add a character between A and B.

The character selected in 1 is deleted. 1 Move the cursor at B. (B is
When the character to be deleted is placed among entered characters, the highlighted in green).
characters after the deleted one shift back by one.
CAPTION OFF 2 2 Display INS. Then, press the
ABC_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ EXEC button.
Note ____________________
____________________
After the EXEC button is pressed, the monitor screen may become dark for a ____________________
moment. ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F < I NS > 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% ABC
5 Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 to enter the remaining characters of the caption.
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ *#$¥£@~| ^
1 Move the cursor at B.
Q1 A 1 S
B blinks when the cursor comes to B.
To enter a space
1 Position the green cursor at the point where you want to enter a space. 2 Highlight INS. (INS blinks in green.)
Then, press the EXEC button.
2 Select SP by pressing the F, f, G or g button.
A single space is inserted between A and B and the green cursor is positioned
3 Press the EXEC button. at the space.
A single space is entered and the green cursor moves to the next position.
If there is a character at the position where the space is entered, that Cursor (lit green)
character is deleted and a single space is left.
CAPTION OFF 2
A _ BC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
To replace a previously entered character without changing the ____________________
____________________
number of characters ____________________
You can replace a previously entered character with a new one. ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F < I NS > 2
1 Position the green cursor at the character to be replaced by performing the 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% A BC
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
operations explained in step 2. !?&/ *#$¥£@~| ^
Cursor (blinking)
Q1 A 1 S
2 Overwrite the invalid character with the correct character by performing the
operations explained in steps 3 and 4.
The previously entered character is replaced with the new one. Note
After the EXEC button is pressed, the monitor screen may become dark for a
To add characters midway moment.
1 Position the cursor at the position where a character is to be added by
performing the operations explained in step 2. 3 Enter the character to be added.
2 Select INS by pressing the F, f, G or g button. Then press the EXEC 6 Press the CAPTION INPUT button.
button. The entered characters are stored in memory.
A single space is inserted between characters and the cursor is positioned at The regular screen appears.
the space.
Or, you can return to the regular screen using the following method:
6 Highlight EXIT by pressing the F, f, G or g button, then press the EXEC

button.
The entered characters are stored in memory.
The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
Note
If you turn off the printer before performing the operation in step 6, characters
entered in steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 are cleared without being stored in memory.
1-31
1-32
To make printouts with a caption Making printouts with a caption

The CAPTION menu allows you to set whether a caption is attached or not to a
printout. Store a caption that you want to attach to the printout beforehand.
Perform the following in step 6 before pressing the CAPTION INPUT button: (See “Entering a Caption” on page 57.)
1 Select ON by pressing the F, f, G or g button.

3 1,2
CAPTION OFF 5 MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
A EB C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ POWER
____________________
____________________
____________________
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . OF F <ON > 5 ALARM PRINT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% A E BC
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ *#$¥£@~| ^
Display ON by pressing
Q1 A 1 S the F, f, G or g button.
Highlight ON by pressing the the F, f, 1 Press the CAPTION ON/OFF button.

G or g button. ON blinks in green. The current setting appears. The video monitor screen is reset to the regular
screen after a few seconds.
Select OFF to make printouts without a caption.
CAPTION ON 5 C A P T I ON :
A EB C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
____________________ OF F / o n
____________________
____________________
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN C . ON <ON > 5 The currently selected setting is
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=% A E BC CAPTION : OFF/ON displayed in capital letters.
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
!?&/ *#$¥£@~| ^ The currently selected setting is lit in green
Q1 A 1 S
2 Select ON.
Press the CAPTION ON/OFF button repeatedly until the color of ON turns
After this, all printouts are made with a caption. green on the video monitor, or until ON is displayed in capital letters on the
You can also decide whether to make printouts with a caption by using the printer window display.
CAPTION ON/OFF button, before attempting to print. Each time you press the CAPTION ON/OFF button, the setting changes in the
order ON c OFF c ON....
When the CAPTION ON/OFF
button is set to ON, C appears.
C A P T I ON :
o f f / ON
Display ON in capital
CAPTION : OFF/ON letters.
Switch ON to green.
To make a printout without a caption
Select OFF.

The printout with a caption is made.
Deleting the Images Stored in Memory
You can delete images captured to memory pages, from either all of the memory 4 Press the g button.
pages or a single memory page, by using the CLEAR button. The FUNCTION SETUP menu appears.
Whether the images of all memory pages or only a single memory page are deleted FUNCTION SETUP COLOR : 200
depends on the setting of CLEAR in the FUNCTION SETUP menu. PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
Setting the Function of the CLEAR Button RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + F UNCT I ON S E TUP
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / PRN S E T UP [ > ]
CLEAR : ALL /
3,5,7 Q1 A 1 S
1
5 Select CLEAR by pressing the F or f button.

RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + C L E AR :
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / ALL / p ag e / o f f
4 CLEAR : ALL /
Press the F or f button until CLEAR
2,6 Q1 A 1 S appears.
Position the cursor at CLEAR by

1 Press the MENU button. pressing the F or f button.
6 Select the function of the CLEAR button by pressing the G or g button.
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears. When you want to Settings
Delete images of all memory pages. ALL
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / Delete images of a single memory page. PAGE
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON Deactivate the CLEAR button. OFF
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] / c / l / PRN / i / o / FUNCTION SETUP COLOR : 200
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters by RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT /
Q1 A 1 S
pressing the G or g button. RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + C L E AR :
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / ALL / p ag e / o f f
Switch PRN to green by pressing RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE /
the G or g button. CLEAR : ALL /
Display the desired function in capital
Q1 A 1 S letters by pressing the G or g button.
3 Select FUNCTION by pressing the F or f button.
Switch the desired function to green by
PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200 pressing the G or g button.
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL
GAMMA
: OFF / ON
: S / NORMAL / H
7 Select PRN SETUP by pressing the F or f button. Then, press the g button.
PRN SPEED : / HIGH F UNCT I ON : The PRINTER SETUP menu appears.
PRE SS [ > ] Once you set the function of the CLEAR button, the CLEAR button functions
SYSTEM : PRESS [ > ] according to the setting until the function setting is changed.
Q1 A 1 S
FUNCTION appears. To return to the regular screen
Press the MENU button.
Position the cursor at FUNCTION
1-33
1-34
Deleting the Images Stored in Memory (Continued)
Deleting Images Stored in Memory Deleting images in a certain memory page
Before deleting images

Note
Set CLEAR to PAGE in the FUNCTION SETUP menu.
You cannot restore images once they have been deleted.
2
Deleting images in all memory pages simultaneously 1 3
Before deleting images in all memory pages MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
POWER
Set CLEAR to ALL in the FUNCTION SETUP menu.

ALARM PRINT
CLEAR button
1 Press the SOURCE/MEMORY button when the source image is displayed on

the video monitor screen.
The image stored in memory is displayed on the screen.
2 Select the memory page from which images are to be deleted by pressing the
MEMORY PAGE button.
Press the CLEAR button.
All images stored in the printer are cleared. 3 Press the CLEAR button.
The image in the memory page selected in step 2 is deleted.
Note
Even if you press the CLEAR button when the source image is displayed on the
video monitor, the memory image appears without deleting images in the memory
pages. In this case, press the CLEAR button again. All images stored in the printer
are cleared.
About the Screen Display

You can erase or display characters displayed on the video monitor (Q1, A and so To display characters on the video monitor
on) and information about the ink ribbon. Select ON.
To perform the setting for the monitor display on the menu

Erasing the Screen Display on the Video Monitor You can also set whether characters are displayed on the video monitor by
changing DISPLAY to ON or OFF in the OUTPUT SETUP menu. The setting of
You can erase characters displayed on the video monitor when, for example, it is the DISPLAY button also changes according to the setting of DISPLAY in the
hard to see the image that is hidden behind the screen display. The printer OUTPUT SETUP menu, and vice versa.
operation is the same, regardless of whether those images are displayed on the
video monitor. Since the same message are displayed in the printer window When you want to see an image that is hedden below a menu
display, perform operations watching these messages in the printer window You can erase the menu temporarily while holding the DISPLAY button down.
display.
Note
The error messages are always displayed regardless of the setting of the monitor
display.
Displaying the Type and Remaining Amount of the Ink

Ribbon
1,2 You can always display the type of the ink ribbon and its remaining amount on the
video monitor.
1 Press the DISPLAY button.
The current setting appears. The video monitor screen is reset to the regular 1,2
D I SP L AY :
o f f / ON
The currently selected setting is

DISPLAY : OFF/ON displayed in capital letters.
1 Press the RIBBON REMAIN button.
The currently selected setting is lit in green The current setting appears. The video monitor screen is reset to the regular
2 Select OFF.
Press the DISPLAY button repeatedly until the color of OFF turns green on the
video monitor, or until OFF is displayed in capital letters in the printer window
display.
Each time you press the DISPLAY button, the setting changes in the order ON R BN REMA I N :
c OFF c ON.... OF F / o n
The currently selected setting is displayed in
RBN REMAIN : OFF/ON capital letters.
D I SP L AY : The currently selected setting is lit in green.
OF F / o n
Display OFF in capital letters.
DISPLAY : OFF/ON
Switch OFF to green.

1-35
1-36
Installation and Adjustment
About the Screen Display (Continued) Supplied Accessories
2 Select ON. The printer is packed together with the following accessories. Check that nothing
Press the RIBBON REMAIN button repeatedly until the color of ON turns is missing from your package.
green on the video monitor, or until ON is displayed in capital letters on the
printer window display.
Each time you press the RIBBON REMAIN button, the setting changes in the
order ON c OFF c ON....
R BN REMA I N :
OF F / o n Ink ribbon holder (1) Paper tray (1)
Display ON in capital letters.

RBN REMAIN : OFF/ON
Switch ON to green.
To erase the information about the ink ribbon Paper cover (1)
AC power cord (1)
Select OFF.
Note
Use the ribbon remain display as a criterion. The correct amount remaining of the
ink ribbon may not be displayed. Color printing pack a) (1)
Warranty card (1) (for US and
Type of ink ribbon Canadian model only)
When the ink ribbon runs out or is not Instructions For Use (1)
loaded, the message “INSERT
RIBBON” appears.
Video monitor a) Use the ink ribbon cartridge and paper for an operation check.
COLOR : 200
COL OR : 2 0 0 Notes
Q1 A 1 S • Retain the original carton and packing materials in case you have to transport the
unit in the future.
Q1 A 1 S
• Remove the ink ribbon cartridge and paper tray when transporting the printer.
200: Number of printouts that can be made with
the ribbon (remaining amount of the ink ribbon)
To perform the setting for the display of ink ribbon information using
the menu
You can also set whether the type of ink ribbon and its remaining amount are
displayed on the video monitor by changing RBN REMAIN to ON or OFF in the

OUTPUT SETUP menu. The setting of the RIBBON REMAIN button also
changes according to the setting of RBN REMAIN in the OUTPUT SETUP menu,
and vice versa.
70 Operation Installation and Adjustment 71

Supplied Accessories (Continued)
Assembly Preparing the Remote Control Unit

Attach the supplied paper cover, paper tray and ink ribbon cartridge to the printer. The following remote control units (not supplied) allow you to control the printer
For details of how to assemble them, see the pages given in parentheses. remotely.
• RM-5500 Remote Control Unit: Used to connect to the REMOTE 1 connector
• RM-91 Remote Control Unit and FS-36 Foot switch: Used to connect to the
REMOTE 2 connector.
• FS-30 Foot switch: Used to connect to the REMOTE 3 connector.
PAGE MEMORY
Using the RM-5500 remote control unit
The RM-5500 Remote Control Unit can be used either as a wireless or wired type.
The buttons on the remote control unit duplicate those on the front panel of the
printer. (See “Main Panel” on page 133 and “Sub Panel” on page 134.)
You can use the remote control unit’s buttons which have the same names as those
on the printer.
To use the RM-5500 remote control unit (not supplied) as a wireless

unit
When using the remote control unit as a wireless unit, aim the head of the remote
control unit at the remote sensor on the printer. With fresh batteries, the range of
Paper tray (page 12) the remote control unit is about 3 meters.
Ink ribbon holder (page 9)
Attach the ink ribbon cartridge
after loading the ink ribbon into
the ink ribbon holder. Using the RM-91/FS-30/FS-36
The operations to be remotely controlled by the RM-91 remote control unit or the
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
FS-30 foot switch depend on the remote operation settings made with the
FUNCTION SETUP menu. (“Selecting the Operating Mode for Automatic Printing
Capabilities” on page 104.)
FS-36 (not supplied) has three switches that have different functions.
For detailed information on how to use those switches, refer to the manual supplied
with the FS-36.
Paper cover
1-37
72 Installation and Adjustment Installation and Adjustment 73

1-38
Connections
To enable printing, video equipment to act as an input signal source, and a video a) This selector is supplied with models other than UP-51MDU. Set the NTSC/PAL selector to your
monitor to display images or menus must be connected. TV system. To switch the TV system, turn the power off once, then change the setting. If you
change the setting with the power on, this mode will not be switched.
The following diagrams illustrate how to make the input, output and remote control
b) Two kinds of 75-ohm termination switches are provided; one is for the RGB input and the other is
connections. Use this as a guide when connecting the required signals to and from for the composite video signal. Normally set this switch to ON. Set it to OFF if the level of the
the equipment to be used for printing. input signal drops because the signal is divided to additional video equipment other than the
printer.
Notes
• Turn off the power of each device before attempting to make any connections.
• Connect the AC power cord last.
Making Connections for Viewing Images to be Printed
Connect a video monitor to view stored images and to check those to be printed.
Making Connections for Capturing Video Images Connect the required video monitor which will be used in actual printing, using the
following diagram as a guide.
Connect the video equipment providing the video images to be printed. Before connecting the video equipment, see “Important safeguards/notices for use
Connect the video equipment which will be used in actual printing, using the in the medical environments” for UP-51MD/51MDU/51MDP on page 2.
following diagram as a guide.
Before connecting the video equipment, see “Important safeguards/notices for use
NTSC/PAL selector a)
in the medical environments” for UP-51MD/51MDU/51MDP on page 2.
NTSC PAL
Video equipment
to RGB output connectors to composite video

output connector
75-ohm coaxial cable with the BNC connectors to S-VIDEO

output
connector
Connecting cable (with DIN 4-pin connectors) YC-15EV to AC IN
to S- to VIDEO OUTPUT
to RGB/SYNC INPUT VIDEO 75-ohm coaxial cable with the BNC connectors
INPUT to RGB/SYNC OUTPUT b) to S-VIDEO
OUTPUT 75-ohm coaxial
cable with BNC
to VIDEO INPUT Connecting cable (with connectors
75-ohm coaxial DIN 4-pin connectors)
cable with BNC YC-15EV to wall outlet
connectors to S-VIDEO to composite AC power cord
input video input (supplied)
connector connector
to RGB input Video monitor

75-ohm termination NTSC/PAL selector a) to AC IN connectors
switch b) ON
OFF
NTSC PAL a) This selector is supplied with models other than UP-51MDU. Set the NTSC/PAL selector to your
to wall outlet TV system. To switch the TV system, turn the power off once, then change the setting. If you
AC power cord change the setting with the power on, this mode will not be switched.
(supplied) b) See “When connecting the video monitor to the RGB SYNC OUTPUT connectors” on the next
page.

Connections (Continued) Setting Up the Printer
When connecting the video monitor to the RGB SYNC OUTPUT You can set up the printer specifications. Once you have adjusted and stored the
connectors settings, the printer operates according to those settings until their values are
Normally, set SYNC ON G in the OUTPUT SETUP menu to ON. modified. You can set up the printer according to its intended purpose, connected
Set SYNC ON G to OFF in the following case: If the images displayed on the equipment or your individual preferences.
video monitor become greenish, compared with the printout, adjust the video There are 11 menus. Functions that can be set on those menus are as follows:
monitor color (set the adjusted value of the video monitor color to the default). (See
“Matching the Video Monitor Color to the Printer Color” on page 83.) If the Menu Functions to be set Reference page
images on the video monitor are still greenish, set SYNC ON G to OFF. COLOR ADJUST Adjusting the printout color (color intensity and contrast) and 86
sharpness.
LAYOUT SETUP • Selecting the memory mode 34
Making Connections to Enable Remote Control • Selecting the type of printouts 37
• Selecting whether white borders are added to multiple reduced 49
The printer can be controlled remotely by connecting an RM-5500 Remote Control images.
Unit (not supplied), RM-91 Remote Control Unit (not supplied), an FS-30/FS-36 • Making a printout of mirror images 53
Foot Switch (not supplied) or a personal computer. • Selecting the lamination pattern 114
WINDOW SETUP • Changing the printout size 96
Computer a) • Changing the printout area 96
CAPTION Entering a caption 57
PRINTER SETUP • Setting the print quantity 23
RS-232C cable • Selecting whether multiple reduced images are automatically stored 41
at regular intervals .
• Adjusting the tone of the printout 92
• Selecting the print mode 30
• Confirming whether the memory image is blurred 48
COLOR BALANCE Adjusting the color balance 98
to RS-232C
SYSTEM SETUP • Adjusting the brightness of the printer window display. 110
• Setting the baud rate for computer communication. 113
• Selecting whether the operation and error tones sound. 112
• Selecting the application mode (printer operation mode) 31
• Compensating for the level of the input signal 81
• Registering user settings 116
USER NAME Editing the user name 116
FUNCTION SETUP • Selecting the image which appears after storing the image into 42
memory, source image or memory image.
to REMOTE 1 to AC IN • Selecting the timing of the pulse signal input to the REMOTE 2 106
connector
to
REMOTE 3 • Selecting operation mode for automatic printing capabilities of 104
remote control units connected to REMOTE 2/REMOTE 3
to wall outlet connectors.
• Setting the function of the CLEAR button 64
to REMOTE 2 AC power cord
B (supplied) INPUT SETUP • Selecting the input signal 16
A C
• Compensating for the input signals. 78

OUTPUT SETUP • Erasing the screen display. 68
c)
FS-30 (not supplied) 83
• Matching the video monitor color to the printout color.
RM-5500 (not supplied) RM-91 (not supplied) b)
• Selecting the output signal from the printer 84
• Selecting whether the printer synchronizes with the internal sync 76
signal included in channel G of the RGB signals.
a) When connecting a personal computer, select the appropriate baud rate from the SYSTEM
SETUP menu. (See “Setting the Baud Rate for Computer Communication” on page 113.) • Selecting whether information on the ink ribbon is displayed 69
b) You can also connect an FS-36 foot switch.
c) You can also control the printer remotely by sending the signal to pin No.5 of the REMOTE 3
connector.
1-39

1-40
Setting Up the Printer (Continued)
This section explains the following settings and adjustments. 2 Press the INPUT SETUP button in the sub panel.
• Compensating for the input signals (on this page) The INPUT SETUP menu appears.
• Matching the video monitor color to the printout color (page 83) Or press the MENU button and display the INPUT SETUP menu by using the
• Adjusting the printout color G or g button.
– Adjusting the color intensity, contrast and sharpness (page 86)
– Adjusting the tone of the printout (page 92) / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
• Changing the printout size/printout area (page 94) HUE : 0
• Adjusting the color balance (page 98) COLOR : 0
I NPUT S E T UP
GAIN : 0
• Selecting the operating mode for automatic printing capability (page 104) OFFSET : 0
AGC : OFF / ON / c / l / p / IN/ o /
• Adjusting the printer window display brightness (page 110)
• Selecting whether to enable the operation and error tones (page 112)
Display IN in capital letters by
• Setting the baud rate for computer communication (page 113) Q1 A 1 S
• Selecting the lamination pattern (page 114)
• Registering the printer settings and adjusted values as a user set (page 116) Switch IN to green by pressing the
G or g button.
Compensating for the Input Signals 3 Perform the adjustments as follows.

1 Select the adjustment item by pressing the F or f button.
2 Perform the adjustment by pressing the G or g button.
A video image recorded under poor conditions may be of poor color quality. If the
signal is an NTSC or PAL composite video signal or separate luminance (Y) and To adjust the color intensity, hue, contrast and brightness
chrominance (C) signals, you can correct the color and level of the input signal to a
certain extent on the INPUT SETUP menu. Adjustment Button to be pressed and operation result
Menu
adjustment
Note item G button g button
You cannot adjust an image once it has been captured in memory. If you make Hue a) HUE a) The hue becomes purplish. The hue becomes
adjustments, capture that image again, after the adjustment. greenish.
Color intensity COLOR b) The color intensity weakens. c) The color intensity
strengthens.
1 4 Contrast GAIN d) The contrast weakens. The contrast strengthens.
Brightness OFFSET Becomes darker. Becomes brighter.
PAGE MEMORY
POWER
a) In PAL mode, no HUE adjustment is provided on the INPUT SETUP menu.

b) Adjust the color such that skin tones appear natural. For the COLOR and HUE adjustment,
ALARM PRINT
you can correct the color intensity and hue of an NTSC composite video signal or a separated
luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) signal.
c) On a setting of step –14, OFF appears and the image, displayed on the monitor screen,
becomes black and white.
2 3 d) To perform adjustment of GAIN, set the AGC (explained below) to OFF.
When the printout or monitor image appears blackish or whitish

1 When the memory image is displayed on the screen, press the SOURCE/ Adjust the input signal to the optimum level for printing.
MEMORY button.
The image from the video source appears. Menu adjustment item Selection When
AGC (Automatic ON a) The printout or monitor image appears
Gain Control) blackish or whitish.

OFF The proper signal is input. (Normal)
a) Adjust GAIN under the condition where AGC is set to ON.

1 Press the F or f button until the

desired item appears. Compensating for the level of the input signal
The images displayed on the video monitor (in EE mode, see page 84) or printouts
still may be whitish due to poor contrast adjustment, even if AGC for the input
HUE : 0 signal is compensated. In such a case, you can adjust the contrast by adjusting
GAIN in the INPUT SETUP menu. However, if you do not want to change the
contrast of the video monitor screen, compensate for the level of the input signal in
the SYSTEM SETUP menu.
CO L OR : 0
Note
HUE : 0 You cannot adjust an image once it has been captured in memory. Capture an
COLOR : 0
GAIN : 0 GA I N : 0 image after compensating for the level of the signal input.
OFFSET : 0
AGC : OFF / ON
1,5
Q1 A 1 S OF F SE T : 0 2,3
1 Position the 2 Make adjustment
cursor at the by pressing the G
desired item by or g button. AGC :
pressing the F
or f button. o f f / ON
2 Make adjustment by pressing

the G or g button 2
To reset items to defaults (0)
4
Place the cursor at the adjustment item to be reset, then press the G and g
buttons simultaneously.
1 Press the MENU button, then select PRN by pressing the G or g button.
4 Press the MENU button. PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200
The regular screen appears. / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters
Q1 A 1 S
Switch PRN to green by

2 Select SYSTEM by using the F or f button, then press the g button.


LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / S Y S T EM S E T UP
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRN SE T UP [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S

1-41

1-42
3 Select IRE by pressing the F or f button.

Matching the Video Monitor Color to the Printer Color
LCD - CONTR : 7 To match the color of the monitor image to that of the printout, adjust the monitor
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
BEEP : OFF / ON
and printer colors such that the monitor color is the same as that of the printout.
APPLI. : STANDARD / I RE : The printer outputs either of two kinds of video signals according to the printer
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] 100 / 11 / 12 / 13 settings.
• EE (E to E): Signals are output to the monitor after being processed by the
Q1 A 1 S
Press the F or f button until IRE appears. printer’s circuitry.
• THRU (THROUGH): Signals are output to the monitor as is.
Position the cursor at IRE by
pressing the F or f button. Adjustment on the video monitor
The monitor color may not be adjusted correctly even if the printer color is
4 Select the desired IRE value by pressing the G or g button. correctly adjusted. Check the color of the video monitor before adjusting the
The selected IRE is displayed in three digits. printout color. In such a case, use the THRU signal by setting SOURCE to THRU
in the OUTPUT SETUP menu or turning off the power of the printer to send out
When IRE value the through signal from the video equipment to the video monitor
After adjusting the color of the video monitor using video monitor controls, adjust
Resetting to the standard adjustment 10 t 100
the color of the printer’s output signal.
The printout is a little whitish. 11 t 110
The printout is whitish. 12 t 120
Adjustment on the printer
The printout is very whitish. 13 t 130
Note
This adjustment is performed to adjust the color of the printer output signal when
SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200 the monitor color is unsatisfactory. This adjustment does not affect the printout
LCD - CONTR : 7
itself. To adjust the color of the printout, see “Adjusting the Printout Color” on
BAUDRATE
BEEP
: / 24 / 4800 / 96
: OFF / ON
page 86.
APPLI. : STANDARD / I RE :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
USER NAME : PRESS [ > ] 1,4,6,8
Display the desired IRE value
2,7
Q1 A 1 S by pressing the G or g button.
Switch the desired IRE value to green

Note
Do not compensate for the input signal too much. Doing so results in the whole
of the printout becoming dark. 1,3,6,7
The regular screen appears. 1 Press the MENU button, then select OUT by pressing the G or g button.
The OUTPUT SETUP menu appears.
OUTPUT SETUP COLOR : 200

DISPLAY : OFF / ON
R B N REMAIN: OFF / ON
SOURCE : THRU / EE
SYNC ON G : OFF / ON O U T PU T SE T UP
MONI C –R : 0
MONI M –G : 0 / c / l / p / i / ou t /
MONI Y –B : 0
Q1 A 1 S
Display OUT in capital letters
Switch OUT to green by pressing Continue to the next page c

the G or g button.
2 Select SOURCE by pressing the F or f button. 7 Adjust the monitor while comparing the printout with the image on the
monitor.
DISPLAY : OFF / ON 1 Select the adjustment item by pressing the F or f button.
RBN REMAIN: OFF / ON
SOURCE : THRU / EE
2 Perform adjustment by pressing the G or g button.
SYNC ON G : OFF / ON S OURCE :
MONI C –R : 0
MONI M–G : 0 T HRU / e e Menu adjustment Button to be Adjustment direction
MONI Y –B : 0
item When you want to pressed on the menu
Press the F or f button until SOURCE MONI C-R Make the screen more g button Toward R (red)
Q1 A 1 S
appears. reddish.
Make the screen become G button Toward C (cyan)
Position the cursor at SOURCE by
cyan (blue).
MONI M-G Make the screen more g button Toward G (green)
greenish.
3 Select EE by pressing the G or g button. Make the screen become G button Toward M (magenta)
magenta (pink)
OUTPUT SETUP COLOR : 200 MONI Y-B Make the screen more g button Toward B (blue)
DISPLAY : OFF / ON
bluish.
R B N REMAIN: OFF / ON Make the screen more G button
SOURCE : THRU / EE
Toward Y (yellow)
SYNC ON G : OFF / ON S OURCE : yellowish.
MONI C –R : 0
MONI M –G : 0 t h r u / EE
MONI Y –B : 0
1 Display the desired adjustment item
Display EE in capital letters by pressing by pressing the F or f button.
Q1 A 1 S the G or g button.
Switch EE to green by pressing

the G or g button. MON I C-R : 0
DISPLAY : OFF / ON

RBN REMAIN: OFF / ON
SOURCE : THRU / EE
SYNC ON G : OFF / ON MON I M - G : 0
The regular screen appears. MONI C –R : 0
MONI M–G : 0
MONI Y –B : 0
5 Capture a new image in memory and make a printout.
Adjust the settings on the printer side by comparing the printout with the image Q1 A 1 S MON I Y-B : 0
on the monitor, as follows.
1 Position the cursor 2 Make adjustment
6 Press the MENU button, then select OUT by pressing the G or g button. at the desired
adjustment item
by pressing the G
or g button.
The OUTPUT SETUP menu appears. by pressing the F 2 Make adjustment by pressing
or f button. the G or g button.

Place the cursor at the adjustment item to be reset, then press the G and g
buttons simultaneously.

1-43

1-44
Adjusting the Printout Color 2 Select LOAD COLOR by pressing the F or f button.
COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200

You can adjust the printout quality by adjusting the color intensity, printout / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP
sharpness and tone (GAMMA) of the printout. CYN – RED : 0
MAG – GRN : 0
YEL – BLU : 0 L OAD CO LOR :
DARK : 0
Adjusting the color intensity, contrast and sharpness LIGHT : 0 1/–/–
SHARPNESS : 8
INTERPOL. : OFF / ON
You can adjust the color intensity (RED/GREEN/BLUE), contrast (DARK/ SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] Display LOAD COLOR by pressing the
Q1 A 1 S F or f button.
LIGHT) and printout sharpness (SHARPNESS/INTERPOL.). You can store up to
three settings.
Position the cursor at LOAD COLOR
These settings are managed according to the LOAD COLOR number. The color by pressing the F or f button.
intensity, picture contrast and sharpness of a printout are determined by recalling
one of the three settings according to their LOAD COLOR numbers. This is useful
when you are using more than one item of video equipment, each having different 3 Select the LOAD COLOR number of the values to be adjusted or to be
characteristics, when you want to print images having different color qualities and modified by pressing the G or g button.
picture contrast, and when multiple users access a single printer.
Also, you can make a printout using temporarily set values, without erasing the COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200
stored adjustment values. LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP
CYN – RED : 0
Perform the adjustments while viewing the images stored in memory. MAG – G R N : 0
All values of the color intensity and contrast are factory-set to 0 and the YEL – BLU : 0 L OAD CO LOR :
DARK : 0
SHARPNESS is set to 8 for LOAD COLOR numbers 1, 2 and 3. LIGHT : 0 –/2/–
SHARPNESS : 8
SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC]
LOAD COLOR button Display the desired LOAD COLOR
Q1 A 1 S
number by pressing the G or g button.
8
1 2,4,5 Switch the desired LOAD COLOR number to
When modifying, you can preserve the original settings. (See “To retain the
originally set value” on page 91.)

7
3,4,6
1 Press the R/G/B/D/L button on the sub panel.

The COLOR ADJUST menu appears.

CYN – RED : 0
MAG – GRN : 0
YEL – BLU : 0 CO L OR AD J US T
DARK : 0
LIGHT : 0 / CO L / l / p / i / o /
SHARPNESS : 8
Q1 A 1 S
Or press the MENU button and display the COLOR ADJUST menu by

4 Adjust the printout color. When adjusting DARK/LIGHT (contrast)
1 Select the item to be adjusted by pressing the F or f button. Adjustment item When you want to
2 Perform the adjustment by pressing the G or g button. DARK Adjust the dark area of an image.
LIGHT Adjust the light area of an image.
The RED, GREEN and BLUE color component and contrast settings are
divided into 15 steps, from –7 to +7, indicated by a value and graph. The
center of the graph (0) corresponds to the standard color. COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200
SHARPNESS is divided into 15 steps from 1 to 15, indicated by a value and LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP DARK : 0
CYN – RED : 0
graph. A setting of step 8 corresponds to the standard sharpness. MAG – GRN : 0
YEL – BLU : 0
For INTERPOL. (interpolation), select either ON or OFF depending on the DARK : 0
type of image LIGHT
SHARPNESS : 8
: 0
L I GHT : 0
When adjusting the RED/GREEN/BLUE (color intensity) Q1 A 1 S
Menu Adjustment Button to be Adjustment direction

item When you want to pressed on the menu
CYN-RED Make the image reddish. g button Toward RED
Make the image cyan. G button Toward CYN (cyan) The contrast in the dark area or light area is increased in the + direction
by pressing the g button.
MAG-GRN Make the image magenta g button Toward MAG The contrast in the dark area or light area is weakened in the – direction
(pink). (magenta) by pressing the G button.
Make the image greenish. G button Toward GRN (green)
When adjusting the sharpness
YEL-BLU Make the image yellowish. g button Toward YEL (yellow)
SHARPNESS
Make the image bluish. G button Toward BLU (blue) You can set the sharpness to any of 15 steps from 1 to 15. A setting of step 8
corresponds to the standard sharpness (default setting).
When you want to Content of settings

CYN – RED : 0
COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200 Make a soft outline. To the left (toward step 1)
LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP Make a normal outline. Centered (step 8)
CYN – RED : 0
MAG – G R N : 0
Make a sharp outline. To the right (toward step 15)
YEL – BLU : 0 MAG –GRN : 0
DARK : 0
LIGHT : 0
SHARPNESS : 8 COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200
INTERPOL. : OFF / ON / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP
Q1 A 1 S YE L B LU : 0 CYN – RED : 0
MAG – GRN : 0
YEL – BLU : 0 SHARPNE SS : 8
DARK : 0
LIGHT : 0
SHARPNESS : 8
Adjust the color intensity for each adjustment item. Q1 A 1 S
The number and the corresponding sharpness increase every

time you press the g button.
The number and the corresponding sharpness decrease
every time you press the G button.

1-45

1-46
INTERPOL. (Interpolation) 6 Select the SAVE COLOR number to which new settings are to be stored by
When you want to Setting
Print out image data such as a figure image or a glandscape. ON / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
Print out image data of computer graphics or with small letters OFF CYN – RED : 0
MAG – G R N : 0
YEL – BLU : 0 S A V E CO LOR :
COLOR ADJUST COLOR : 200 DARK : 0
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / LIGHT : 0 – / 2 / – [ E X EC ]
LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP SHARPNESS : 8
CYN – RED : 0 INTERPOL. : OFF / ON
MAG – GRN : 0 SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] Display the desired SAVE COLOR
YEL – BLU : 0 I N T ERPO L : Q1 A 1 S
number by pressing the G or g button.
DARK : 0
LIGHT : 0 OF F / o n
SHARPNESS : 8
INTERPOL. : OFF / ON Switch the desired SAVE COLOR number
SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] Display desired setting in capital to green by pressing the G or g button.
Q1 A 1 S letters by pressing the G or g button.
Switch the desired setting to green by

To retain the originally set value
pressing the G or g button. Select a SAVE COLOR number which is different from the LOAD COLOR
number selected in step 3.
Note
Effectiveness of SHARPNESS may differ between ON and OFF settings of 7 Press the EXEC button.
INTERPOL. The settings are registered in the SAVE COLOR number selected in step 6.
TEMP disappears from the menu.
Place the cursor at the adjustment item to be reset, then press the G and g 8 To continue settings for another LOAD COLOR number, repeat steps 3 to 7.
buttons simultaneously. To finish the setting, press the MENU button.
Once you have changed the value
Once you have changed the value, TEMP (temporary) appears on the menu To copy the settings made for one LOAD COLOR number to another
screen. TEMP indicates that the settings are temporary and have not yet been LOAD COLOR number
stored. If you turn off the power of the printer while TEMP is displayed, the
adjusted values are not stored. 1 Select the source LOAD COLOR number for which the settings to be copied
are stored in the COLOR ADJUST menu.
5 Select SAVE COLOR by pressing the F or f button.
2 Select the target SAVE COLOR number to which data is to be copied.
CYN – RED : 0 Settings stored to the LOAD COLOR number selected in step 1 are copied to
MAG – GRN : 0
YEL – BLU : 0 S A V E CO LOR : the SAVE COLOR number selected in step 2.
DARK : 0
LIGHT : 0 1 / – / – [ E X EC ]
SHARPNESS : 8 To recall the LOAD COLOR number in which printout color settings
SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] Display SAVE COLOR by (color intensity, contrast and sharpness) are stored
Q1 A 1 S
pressing the F or f button. Switch the desired LOAD COLOR number to green in the COLOR ADJUST
menu.
Position the cursor at SAVE COLOR

Or press the LOAD COLOR button on the sub panel. Each time you press the
button, the currently selected LOAD COLOR number is displayed for about three
seconds. To select the desired LOAD COLOR number, release the button while the
desired number is displayed.
The printout is made according to the setting of the selected LOAD COLOR
number as long as you do not modify those settings.

Adjusting the tone of the printout 3 Select the desired tone by pressing the G or g button.
The selected tone is spelled out.
You can adjust the tone so that the details in the white or black part are clearly
printed. When you want to Setting
Make a printout of an image where there are a lot of S t SOFT
white or light-colored areas.
1,4 Make a printout of a normal image. N t NORMAL

2 Make a printout of an image where there are
a lot of black or dark-colored areas.
H t HARD

PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH G AMMA :
s / NORMA L / h
3 LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
SYSTEM
FUNCTION
: PRESS [ > ]
: PRESS [ > ]
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display the desired tone by pressing
Q1 A 1 S
the G or g button.
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears. Switch the desired tone to green by
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON The regular screen appears.
Q1 A 1 S
Switch PRN to green by pressing

the G or g button.
2 Select GAMMA by pressing the F or f button.

PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
PRN SPEED : / HIGH G AMMA :
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] s / NORMA L / h
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display GAMMA by pressing the
Q1 A 1 S F or f button.
Position the cursor at GAMMA by

1-47

1-48
Changing the Printout Size/Printout Area 2 Select WINDOW by pressing the F or f button.

When you print an image that is narrower or wider than the standard screen size, a / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
black frame may be printed or the image may be partially cut. In such a case, you MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
can change the screen size. Or, a black line may be produced on the printout even MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR W I NDOW :
though it does not appear on the video monitor. Any portion for which there is no WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] L A Y PRE SS [ > ]
video signal is printed in black. This may occur when you make printouts after CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]
connecting a different video source or play back using different video software. In Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S WINDOW appears.
such a case, you can adjust the printout area by moving the screen either
horizontally or vertically. When a black frame appears around the printout, even
Position the cursor at WINDOW
after the printout area has been shifted, narrow the printout size because the image by pressing the F or f button.
has been overscanned beyond the range of the regular screen.
Note
Note
If you go to the next step after you select WINDOW in step 2, the images
This adjustment affects only the input signal. This adjustment does not affect the
stored in the memory will be cleared.
image captured in the memory.
2,4,5,6 The WINDOW SETUP menu appears.
1,7 5 WINDOW SETUP COLOR : 200
LAY SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
H START : 0 DOT (S)
V START : 0 DOT (S)
H WIDTH : 896 DOTS
V WIDTH : 464 DOT (S) W I NDOW SE T UP
SAVE : PRESS [ EXEC ]
CANCEL : PRESS [ EXEC ] L A Y S E T UP [ > ]
Q1 A 1 S
3,6
1,4 4 Adjust the printer according to the printout obtained.
1 Press the MENU button, then select LAY by pressing the G or g button.
1 Select the item to be adjusted by pressing the F or f button.
The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
2 Perform the adjustment by pressing the G or g button.
MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON Continue to the next page c
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] / c / L AY / p / i / o /

Q1 A 1 S
Switch LAY to green by pressing

the G or g button.

When a black frame is printed or the image is partially cut When the black line is at the right or left edge
Adjust the printout size by using the H WIDTH and V WIDTH items from the
menu.
WINDOW SETUP COLOR : 200
LAY SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
When you want to Menu adjustment Button to be Adjustment result H START : 0 DOT (S) H S T AR T :
item (defaults) used V START : 0 DOT (S)
H WIDTH : 896 DOTS 0 DOT ( S )
Change the screen H-WIDTH g button Widened at the right edge V WIDTH : 464 DOT (S)
size horizontally (NTSC: 896, (toward the right direction SAVE : PRESS [ EXEC ]
PAL: 896) of the screen). CANCEL : PRESS [ EXEC ]
and adjust the V S T AR T :
position Narrowed with the left
G button 0 DOT ( S )
of the right edge. edge remaining fixed. Q1 A 1 S
The left edge
remains fixed.
Change the screen V-WIDTH g button Enlarged downwards.
When the black line is at the top or bottom
size vertically and (NTSC: 464, Vertical size reduced with
adjust the position PAL: 560) G button
the top edge remaining Note
of the bottom edge. fixed.
The top edge When a black line still appears, even after adjusting H START or V START,
remains fixed. change the printout size.
Adjusting the printout size horizontally. 5 Select SAVE by pressing the F or f button, then press the EXEC button.
The adjusted values are stored. The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears.
WINDOW SETUP
LAY SETUP
COLOR : 200
: PRESS [ > ]
H START : 0 DOT (S) H W I DTH : The regular screen appears.
V START : 0 DOT (S)
H WIDTH : 896 DOTS 8 9 6 DOT S
V WIDTH : 464 DOT (S)
SAVE : PRESS [ EXEC ]
To clear the adjusted value
CANCEL : PRESS [ EXEC ] Select CANCEL in step 5, then press the EXEC button on the sub panel. The
V W I DTH :
values adjusted in step 4 are cleared and the values are reset to the original ones.
4 6 4 DOT S
Q1 A 1 S
To reset the adjusted value to defaults
Press the G and g buttons simultaneously. The adjusted values are reset to the
Adjusting the printout size vertically. defaults.
To check the adjustment result

When a black line appears on the printout
Capture a new image and print it to check that no black frame appears on the
Adjust the printout area according to the position of the line on the printout, by
printout, that the image is not partially cut, and that no black line appears.
using the H START and V START items on the menu.
Position where the Menu adjustment Button to Adjustment result

black line appears item (defaults) be used
On the right H START g button The image position shifts to the
(NTSC/PAL: 0) right with the size remaining as is.
On the left G button The image position shifts to the
left with the size remaining as is.
At the top V START g button The image position shifts up with
(NTSC/PAL: 0) the size remaining as is.
At the bottom G button The image position shifts down
with the size remaining as is.
1-49

1-50
Adjusting the Color Balance 3 Select C-BALANCE by pressing the F or f button.

You should use the ink ribbon and paper that are contained in the same package as PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
a pair. The color balance may differ depending on each pair. INTERVAL
GAMMA
: OFF / ON
: S / NORMAL / H
It is recommended that you adjust the color balance each time you load a new ink PRN SPEED : / HIGH C - B A L ANCE :
ribbon and paper. LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE SS [ > ]
Before adjusting the color balance C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Press the F or f button until
Q1 A 1 S
Reset all items in the COLOR ADJUST menu to defaults. (See “Adjusting the C-BALANCE appears.
Printout Color” on page 86.)

Position the cursor at C-BALANCE by
6 3,5,7,10 4 Press the g button.

1 2,11 8 The COLOR BALANCE menu appears.
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
The highlighted area will be printed for adjusting the color balance.
POWER You can move this area at any place on the video monitor.
COLOR BALANCE COLOR : 200

ALARM PRINT
BAL X
BAL Y
BC
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
The area that will be
captured in memory
(This area is
BAL STEP
YZ
: 05 [1 – 20]
TEST PRINT : PRESS [EXEC]
5 4 highlighted and is
5,7,10 two thirds the size of
the whole screen.)
Q1 A 1 S
1 Display the source image on the video monitor by using the SOURCE/
MEMORY button. When you adjust the color balance for the first time after you purchase the
printer, the values of BAL X, BAL Y and BAL STEP are set to 50, 50 and 05
2 Press the MENU button, then select PRN by pressing the G or g button. at the factory.
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears on the source image. The BAL STEP is the adjustable range for each color balance.
When you have adjusted color balance already, the values adjusted previously
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / are displayed on the COLOR BALANCE menu.
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H COLOR BALANCE COLOR : 200
PRN SPEED : / HIGH
P R I NT ER S E T UP BAL X BC
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] / c / l / PRN / i / o / BAL Y : 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
SYSTEM
FUNCTION
: PRESS [ > ]
: PRESS [ > ]
BAL STEP
YZ
: 05 [1 – 20]
TEST PRINT : PRESS [EXEC] BA L X :
Q1 A 1 S
Display PRN in capital letters 50 [ 1 - 50 - 99 ]
The currently adjusted value of BAL X

Switch PRN to green by pressing Q1 A 1 S
In this printer window display, the
the G or g button.
default value of BAL X is displayed.
The currently adjusted values of BAL X, BAL Y

and BAL STEP
On this COLOR BALANCE menu, the default
values (factory settings) are displayed.
To reset the values to defaults (50/50/05)

Select each item by pressing the F or f button, then press the G and g buttons
at the same time. The currently selected item is reset to the default.

5 Decide the position of the source image to be used for adjusting the color 8 Press the EXEC button.
balance. Nine identical images are printed on a sheet of paper as a test print.
To decide the position of the source image, move the highlighted area by Each image has a different color balance.
pressing the F, f, G or g button while holding down the DISPLAY button on
the sub panel.
ABC ABC ABC
XYZ XYZ XYZ
Move the highlighted part A B C ABC ABC ABC

to the desired image
position by pressing the
X Y Z XYZ XYZ XYZ
F, f, G or g button while
holding down the ABC ABC ABC
DISPLAY button. (The
COLOR BALANCE menu XYZ XYZ XYZ
disappears temporarily.) Q1 A 1 S
COLOR BALANCE (X&Y) 45&45 50&45 55&45 45&50 50&50 55&50 45&55 50&55 55&55
6 Press the CAPTURE button. Indicates the color balance of the images printed at
the top. (From the left, 45 & 45, 50 & 45, 55 & 45)
The image captured in memory appears.
Indicates the color balance of the images printed in the
middle. (From the left, 45 & 50, 50 & 50, 55 & 50) Indicates the color balance
COLOR BALANCE COLOR : 200 of the images printed at the
A B C
BAL X
BAL Y
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
bottom. (From the left, 45 &
55, 50 & 55, 55 & 55)
X Y Z
BAL STEP : 05 [1 – 20]
Example of the actual color change in the test print
Q1 A 1 S
Yellow greenish Yellowish Orangish
7 Select TEST PRINT by pressing the F or f button.

Greenish Standard Reddish

A B C
BAL X
BAL Y
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99] Blue greenish Bluish Red purplish
X Y Z
BAL STEP : 05 [1 – 20]
TEST PRINT : PRESS [EXEC] T E S T PR I N T :
PRE S S [ E XE C ]
Press the F or f button until TEST

Q1 A 1 S
PRINT appears.
9 Select the image which has the best color balance among the nine images.
Position the cursor at TEST PRINT by
If you want to change the color balance after you see the printout, adjust the
color balance again, referring to “To readjust the color balance” on page 102.

1-51

1-52
10 Display the values of BAL X and BAL Y corresponding to the ones of the To perform rough adjustment
image selected in step 9 by using the G or g button. To perform color balance adjustment beyond the current color balance range,
increase the value of the BAL STEP.
Example: When the color balance (55 & 45) of the image printed on the
bottom left is the best: If you change BAL STEP from 05 to 10, the color
balances of the test print are changed as
COLOR BALANCE COLOR : 200 illustrated.
PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ] BA L X :
BAL X : 55 [1 – 50 – 99]
BAL Y : 45 [1 – 50 – 99] 55 [ 1 - 50 - 99 ]
B A L STEP : 05 [1 – 20]
TEST PRINT : PRESS [EXEC] Display BAL X by pressing the F or f button, PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
then 55 by pressing the G or g button. BAL X : 50 [1 – 50 – 99] 40&40 50&40 60&40
BAL Y : 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
B A L STEP : 10 [1 – 20]
Q1 A 1 S
BA L Y :
40&50 50&50 60&50
45 [ 1 - 50 - 99 ]
Display 55 for BAL X and 45 for BAL Y Display BAL Y by pressing the F or f button, Q1 A 1 S
by pressing the G or g button. then 45 by pressing the G or g button. 40&60 50&60 60&60
The color balance has been adjusted to the values selected in step 9.

2 Make a test print by repeating steps 5, 6, 7 and 8 in “Adjusting the Color
Balance” on page 98.
To readjust the color balance

3 Select the image with the best color balance among the 9 images, if you can
decide. Then display the values of BAL X and BAL Y by using the F, f, G or
When the desired color balance cannot be obtained in step 9, readjust the color
g button.
balance.
You can also perform fine adjustment following the same operation procedures.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have obtained the best color balance.
1 Display the values of BAL X and BAL Y of the image which is the most
4 Go back to step 10 in “Adjusting the Color Balance” on page 102.
appropriate among nine images.
In this case, you can perform fine adjustment or rough adjustment by changing
the value of BAL STEP.
To perform fine adjustment

To perform color balance adjustment within the current color balance range,
reduce the value of BAL STEP.
If you change BAL STEP from 05 to 03, the color
balances of the test print are changed as
illustrated.

BAL X : 50 [1 – 50 – 99] 47&47 50&47 53&47
BAL Y : 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
BAL STEP : 03 [1 – 20]
47&50 50&50 53&50
Q1 A 1 S
47&53 50&53 53&53
Note
The above illustration indicates the color balance when the balance step is
changed from 05 to 03. However, on the actual printout, values of the color
balance are not printed on each image. They are printed on the bottom of the
printout.
2 Select FUNCTION by pressing the F or f button.

Selecting the Operation Mode for Automatic Printing
Capabilities PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
You can control the printer using either of the following remote control units GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H
PRN SPEED : / HIGH F UNCT I ON :
connected to the REMOTE 2 or REMOTE 3 connector on the rear panel of the MOTION CHK : OFF / ON
printer. LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE SS [ > ]
• RM-91 Remote control unit (not supplied): Connected to the REMOTE 2 FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ]
connector Q1 A 1 S
FUNCTION appears.
• FS-30 Foot switch (not supplied): Connected to the REMOTE 3 connector.
In addition, you can also remote control the printer by using a remote control unit Position the cursor at FUNCTION
which sends the remote control signal to the Pin No.5 of the REMOTE 3 by pressing the F or f button.
connector.
Using the menu, you can assign the desired functions to the remote control unit
The FUNCTION SETUP menu appears.
connected to the REMOTE 2 or REMOTE 3 connector.
In addition, the printer can be remotely controlled by a pulse signal input to FUNCTION SETUP COLOR : 200
REMOTE 2 or REMOTE 3. (See pages 124 and 125). AUTO LIVE : OFF / ON
Also, you can control the printer using a personal computer. RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT /
F UNCT I ON S E TUP
RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE +
For detailed information on controlling with the computer, contact with your Sony RM3B FUNC : / BACK - SP /
dealer. RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / PRN S E T UP [ > ]
CLEAR : ALL /
Note Q1 A 1 S
The FS-36 foot switch is connected to REMOTE 2 to control the printer. However,
the function of this foot switch cannot be assigned using the menu. To assign the functions of a remote control unit connected to REMOTE 2, go
to step 4.
To assign the functions of a remote control unit connected to REMOTE 3 (3A/
2,4,6 3B/3C/3E), go to step 6.
1,7
4 Select IMMED. CAP by pressing the F or f button.

RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + I MMED . CAP :
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / OF F / o n
3 RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE
CLEAR : / ALL
/
/
5,6 Q1 A 1 S
Press the F or f button until IMMED.
CAP appears.
1 Press the MENU button, then select PRN by pressing the G or g button. Position the cursor at IMMED. CAP by
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears on the source image. pressing the F or f button.

PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
Switch PRN to green by

1-53

1-54
5 Select the timing to capture the image by pressing the G or g button. FUNCTION SETUP COLOR : 200
when you want to Selection IMMED. CAP. : OFF / ON
Capture the image just after the trigger pulse is ON RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + RM 2 F UNC :
input to REMOTE 2 connector. a) RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / / C & PR I N T /
Capture the image a certain interval after the OFF CLEAR : / ALL /
trigger pulse is input to the REMOTE 2 connector. b) Display the desired remote control
Q1 A 1 S unit by pressing the F or f button.
a) When IMMED. CAP is set to ON, display the source image on the video monitor when
Position the cursor at the desired remote
sending the trigger pulse to the printer. The printer operation is set only to capture the image control unit by pressing the F or f button.
when receiving the trigger pulse.
b) The timing is decided at the factory. The figure shows the case where you want to assign a function to the remote
control unit connected to REMOTE 2. You can select any remote control unit in
For detailed information on the timing for the REMOTE 2 connector, see page the same way.
124.
2 Assign a function to the remote control unit selected in 1 by pressing the G
Notes or g button.
• Select ON when you want to capture the image at the precise timing
Function to be selected Operation
controlled from the computer.
• To assign the function to the remote control unit connected to the REMOTE GRAB Captures an image when you press the switch of the
remote control unit. When the type of multiple
2 connector on the FUNCTION SETUP menu, set the IMMED.CAP item on reduced images has been selected, the cursor (green
the FUNCTION SETUP menu to OFF. pointer) does not move on the video monitor. Also,
the memory page is not changed.
CAPTURE Has the same function as the CAPTURE button on
AUTO LIVE : OFF / ON the printer.
RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT / PRINT Has the same function as the PRINT button on the
RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + I MMED . CAP : printer.
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / o f f / ON C & PRINT a) Captures an image to a memory page where there is
RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE / (CAPTURE & PRINT) not queued image to be printed. If you press the
CLEAR : / ALL / switch while printing is being performed, the selected
Display the desired timing
Q1 A 1 S selection in capital letters by image is queued, with the queued image being
pressing the G or g button. printed once printing has been completed.
CYCLIC-C b) Captures images to memory pages where there are
Switch the desired timing selection to
(CYCLIC CAPTURE) not queued images, cyclically whenever you press
the switch. The printer continues to capture images,
replacing the one previously captured with a new
6 Select the remote control unit and assign the function to the selected remote one.
control unit. CAP-STOP b) Captures images in a memory page when you press
(CAPTURE STOP) the switch of the remote control unit. Once images
have been captured in all the memory pages, the
1 Select the remote control unit to which you want to assign a function by printer stops capturing images and the message HIT
pressing the F or f button. ANY KEY appears.
BACK-SP The pointer (green) returns to its former position
Remote control unit to Remote control unit name (CAPTURE BACK) whenever you press the switch when the type of
which the function is assigned written on the menu multiple reduced images has been selected.
RM-91 connected to REMOTE 2 RM2 FUNC POINTER+ The cursor (green pointer) moves to the next position
whenever you press the switch when the type of

FS-30 connected to REMOTE 3 Button A of FS-30 RM3A FUNC multiple reduced images has been selected.
Button B of FS-30 RM3B FUNC STOP Stops printing after the current printing operation is
Button C of FS-30 RM3C FUNC finished whenever you press the switch of the remote
control unit.
Remote control unit that sends RM3E FUNC
the trigger pulse to Pin No.5 of
REMOTE 3 Continue to the next page c

Function to be selected Operation

RM 2 F UNC :
CAP/SRC When the memory image is displayed, the source
(CAPTURE/SOURCE) image appears whenever you press the switch. CA P TURE /
When the source image is displayed, the image is PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
captured in memory whenever you press the switch IMMED. CAP. : OFF / ON
of the remote control unit. However, the memory RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT /
page is not changed. The previously captured image RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE + RM 2 F UNC :
is replaced with the new one. RM3B FUNC : / BACK - SP /
RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC / C A P - S TOP /
b)
C/SRC PAGE When the memory image is displayed, the source RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE /
CLEAR : / ALL /
(CAPTURE/SOURCE PAGE) image appears whenever you press the switch of the
remote control unit. Q1 A 1 S
When the source image is displayed, the image is RM 2 F UNC :

captured in memory whenever you press the switch. Switch the desired function to green by
The memory page is also changed. The captured pressing the G or g button.
SRC & C PAGE /
image is not printed. When / is displayed at the right or left
end, another function can be selected
PRINT & PAGE Starts to print when you press the switch if the image by pressing the G or g button.
has been captured in the memory, and at the same Display the desired function by pressing
time moving to the next memory page. the G or g button.
If the image has not been captured in the memory When / is displayed at the right or left
end, another function can be selected
page, the printer does not work correctly when you by pressing the G or g button.
press the switch of the remote control unit.
SRC & CAP When you press and hold down the switch of the
(SOURCE & CAPTURE) remote control unit, the source image appears.
When you release the switch, the image showing at
the instant you release the switch is captured. The The function that can be assigned depends on the remote control unit selected
memory page is not changed. in step 1.
SRC & C PAGE b) When you press and hold down the switch of the
(SOURCE & CAPTURE PAGE) remote control unit, the source image appears. Remote control unit
When you release the switch, the image showing at
the instant you release the switch is captured. Then, Function to be assigned REMOTE 2 REMOTE 3A/3B/3C REMOTE 3E
the memory page is changed to the next memory GRAB × × a
page. The captured image is not printed.
CAPTURE a a ×
a) When you use the remote control unit under this function, confirm that the source image is PRINT a a ×
displayed on the video monitor. If not, press the SOURCE/MEMORY button so that the C & PRINT a a a
source image will be displayed. When multiple reduced images are captured, after the last CYCLIC-C a a ×
image is captured, the printer prints the captured image (or queues printing), then the printer
CAP-STOP a a ×
goes to the next memory page.
b) When multiple reduced images are captured, after the last image is captured, the printer goes BACK-SP a a ×
to the next memory page. POINTER+ a a ×
STOP a a ×
CAP/SRC a a ×
C/SRC PAGE a a ×
PRINT & PAGE a a ×
SRC & CAP a a ×
SRC & C PAGE a a ×

1-55

1-56
Adjusting the Brightness of the Printer Window 3 Press the g button.

Display
When it is hard to read the contents of the printer window display, adjust the LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
brightness using the menu. BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / S Y S T EM S E T UP
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRN SE T UP [ > ]
2,4,6
1,7 Q1 A 1 S
4 Select LCD-CNTR by pressing the F or f button.

LCD - CNTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / L CD - CN T R : 7
3,6 IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
1,5 SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]

Display LCD-CNTR by pressing

Q1 A 1 S
the F or f button.
The PRINTER SETUP menu appears on the source image. Position the cursor at LCD-CNTR
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
INTERVAL : OFF / ON
5 Adjust the brightness of the printer window display by pressing the G or g
P R I NT ER S E T UP button.
PRN SPEED : / HIGH
LCD - CNTR : 5
C - BALANCE : PRESS [ > ] Display PRN in capital letters BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
Q1 A 1 S by pressing the G or g button. BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / L CD - CN T R : 5
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
Switch PRN to green by pressing SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
the G or g button. USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
2 Select SYSTEM by pressing the F or f button.

Q1 A 1 S

The number increases and the contrast increases every
PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ] time the g button is pressed.
INTERVAL : OFF / ON The number decreases and the contrast decreases every
GAMMA : S / NORMAL / H time the G button is pressed.
PRN SPEED : / HIGH S Y S T EM :
LOAD USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE SS [ > ] Note
FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ] If you select the left end scale, OFF is displayed. In this case, no messages
Q1 A 1 S
Press the F or f button until appears in the printer window display when the video monitor returns to the
SYSTEM appears.
regular screen.
Position the cursor at SYSTEM
by pressing the F or f button. 6 Select PRN SETUP by pressing the F or f button, then press the g button.
The adjusted values are stored. The PRINTER SETUP menu appears.


Selecting Whether the Operation and Error Tones SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200
LCD - CONTR : 7
Sound BAUDRATE
BEEP
: / 24 / 48 / 9600
: OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / BEEP :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
Whenever you press a button on the front panel or sub panel, the operation tone SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] o n / OF F
sounds (one time). When an error occurs, the alarm tone sounds (three times). You
can turn these tones on and off using the menu. Display the desired operation in
Q1 A 1 S
capital letters by pressing the G
or g button.
2,4 Switch the desired operation to
5 green by pressing the G or g button.
4 Select PRN SETUP by pressing the F or f button, then press the g button.
The adjusted values are stored. The PRINTER SETUP menu appears.

4 Setting the Baud Rate for Computer Communication

3
When controlling the printer with a computer connected to the printer’s RS-232C
connector, select the appropriate baud rate. For details, contact your nearest Sony
1 Display the SYSTEM SETUP menu. dealer.
To display the SYSTEM SETUP menu, see steps 1 to 3 in “Adjusting the
Brightness of the Printer Window Display” on page 110.
2,4
2 Select BEEP by pressing the F or f button. 5
LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 48 / 9600
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / BEEP :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] OF F / o n
Display BEEP by pressing

Q1 A 1 S the F or f button. 4
3
Position the cursor at BEEP by
1 Display the SYSTEM SETUP menu.
3 Select whether the operation and error tones sound by pressing the G or g Brightness of the Printer Window Display” on page 110.
button.
When you want to Selection

2 Select BAUD RATE by pressing the F or f button.
Sound the tones. ON SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200

Disable the tones. OFF LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 48 / 9600
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / B AUDRA T E :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] 12 / 24 / 48 / 9600
Display BAUD RATE by

Q1 A 1 S pressing the F or f button.
Position the cursor at BAUD RATE by Continue to the next page c

1-57

1-58
3 Select the desired baud rate by pressing the G or g button. 1 Press the MENU button, then select LAY by pressing the G or g button.
The LAYOUT SETUP menu appears on the source image.
Baud rate (bps) Baud rate displayed on the menu. (The display changes from LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200
first two digit indication to four digit indication.) / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
1200 12 t 1200 MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
SEPARATE : OFF / ON
2400 24 t 2400 MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR L A YOU T SE T UP
4800 LAMINATION : GLOSSY /
48 t 4800 WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] / c / L AY / p / i / o /
9600 96 t 9600 CAPTION : PRESS [ > ]

SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200 Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button.
LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 48 / 9600 Switch LAY to green by pressing the
BEEP : OFF / ON G or g button.
APPLI. : STANDARD / B AUDRA T E :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] 12 / 24 / 48 / 9600 2 Select LAMINATION by pressing the F or f button.
Display the desired baud / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
Q1 A 1 S MEMORY : FRAME / FIELD
rate in four digits by MULTI PIX : 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
pressing the G or g button. SEPARATE : OFF / ON
Switch the desired baud rate to green by MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR L AM I NA T I ON :
pressing the G or g button. The selected LAMINATION : GLOSSY /
baud rate is displayed in four digits.
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] G L OS S Y /
4 Select PRN SETUP by pressing the F or f button, then press the g button.
Q1 A 1 S
The adjusted values are stored. The PRINTER SETUP menu appears. LAMINATION appears.
Position the cursor at LAMINATION by

5 Press the MENU button. pressing the F or f button.
3 Select the amination pattern according to the desired finish of printouts by
Selecting the Lamination Pattern
When you want to Lamination pattern
Using the UPC-540 Self-Laminating Color Printing Pack ensures that the printout Make a glossy printout. GLOSSY
is well preserved. Make a printout with a textured finish. TEXTURE
You can select the lamination pattern according to the finish you want to have on Make a matte printout. MATTE
the printout.
LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : nnn
1,4 2 MEMORY
MULTI PIX
SEPARATE
: FRAME / FIELD
: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16
: OFF / ON
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR L AM I NA T I ON :
WINDOW : PRESS [ > ] G L OS S Y /
Display the desired lamination pattern by

Q1 A 1 S
When / is displayed at the right or left end,
another lamination pattern can be selected
Switch the lamination pattern to green by by pressing the G or g button.

When / is displayed at the right or left end,
3 another lamination pattern can be selected


Registering a User Set 3 Press the g button.

The USER NAME menu appears.
USER NAME 1
You can store up to three settings of all the printer specifications, set or adjusted by ____________________
using the buttons or with the menu, and store those settings as a user set. The
printer retains these setting - even if you turn off the power.
Thus, different operators can make printouts with different settings by recalling the
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN US ER NAME < A > 0 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=%
appropriate user set. ’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
If the data of the recalled user set is modified, the printer operates according to the !?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
INS DEL SP EXIT
modified data. In such a case, the modified data remains effective until another user
set is recalled with the LOAD USER button, even if you turn off the power.
For detailed information on how to enter characters, see “Entering a Caption”
After you finish all of required settings, proceed as follows to register them as a on page 57.
user set. You can use up to 16 characters.
LOAD USER button 4 Select EXIT by pressing the F, f, G or g button on the USER NAME menu,
2,4,5 then press the EXEC button.
8 4,7 The user name is stored, and the SYSTEM SETUP menu appears again.
5 Select SAVE USER by pressing the F or f button.

LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / S A V E US ER :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] 1 / – / – [ E XE C ]
3 USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
3,4,6
Q1 A 1 S
Display SAVE USER by pressing
the F or f button.
1 Display the SYSTEM SETUP menu. Position the cursor at SAVE USER by
Brightness of the Printer Window Display” on page 110. 6 Select the desired user set number by pressing the G or g button.
If you want to name a user set, go to step 2. SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200
If you do not want to name a user set, go to step 5. PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
LCD - CONTR : 7
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96
2 Select USER NAME by pressing the F or f button. BEEP

APPLI.
: OFF / ON
: STANDARD / S A V E US ER :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] – / 2 / – [ E XE C ]
SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200 USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
LCD - CONTR : 7 Display the desired user set number by
BAUDRATE : / 24 / 4800 / 96 Q1 A 1 S pressing the G or g button.
BEEP : OFF / ON
APPLI. : STANDARD / U S ER NAME :
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13 Switch the desired user set number to
SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ] PRE S S [ > ] green by pressing the G or g button.
Display USER NAME by

Q1 A 1 S
Position the cursor at USER NAME All data currently set and adjusted are registered in the user set number
selected in step 6.
When you name a user set in step 3, the user name is also registered at the
same time.
1-59

1-60
8 Press the MENU button. To copy the existing user set

The regular screen appears. You can copy an existing user set to another user set number.
The printer operates according to this registered data unless you recall another user 1 Select the source user set number by pressing the LOAD USER button.
set. Also, if you modify the settings, the modified data remains effective until
another user set is recalled with the LOAD USER button, even if you turn off the 2 Press the EXEC button to execute the selected user set.
power.
Note
To make another user set If the user set is changed, all images in memory will be cleared.
Perform all required settings and adjustments using the menus, then register them
with another user set number. 3 Select the target user set number with SAVE USER on the SYSTEM SETUP
menu.
To recall the user set and print
Select the desired user set by pressing the LOAD USER button. Each time you 4 Press the EXEC button.
press the LOAD USER button, user sets are recalled in the order of 1, 2, 3, 1.... The set values of the source user set, selected in step 1, are copied to the target
Then, press the EXEC button to execute the selected user set. user set number selected in step 3.
The printer operates according to the recalled user set. If you modify the set value,
the printer operates according to the modified data until you recall another user set.
Note
If the user set is changed, all images stored in memory will be cleared.
To retain the originally set values

Example: Modify the settings made for user set 1. Retain the original settings of
user set 1 and register the modified set values as user set 2.
1 Select user set 1 by pressing the LOAD USER button.

Each time you press the LOAD USER button, the user sets are recalled in the
order of 1, 2, 3, 1....
2 Press the EXEC button to execute the selected user set.
Note
If the user set is changed, all images stored in memory will be cleared.
3 Modify the recalled set values.
4 Select 2 from SAVE USER on the SYSTEM SETUP menu.

The set values, modified in step 3, are registered as user set 2.

Others
Precautions
Safety Location
• Operate the printer using the power source specified in “Specifications” (page To prevent internal heat built-up, leave enough room around the printer for air to
123). circulate through the vents on the left hand side of the cabinet.
• Be careful not to damage the AC power cord by placing or dropping heavy
objects on it; it is dangerous to use the unit with a damaged AC power cord.
• If you do not intend to use the unit for a long time, disconnect the AC power
On Transportation
cord.
• Unplug the AC power cord by grasping the plug, not the cable itself.
Do not transport the printer with the supplied accessories. Doing so may cause
• Do not disassemble the unit.
malfunction.
• Do not remove the cover. There is a danger of electric shock from the internal
parts.
• Be careful not to spill water or other liquids on the unit, or to allow combustible Cleaning
or metallic material to enter the cabinet. If used with foreign matter in the
cabinet, the unit is liable to fail, or present a risk of fire or electric shock. Clean the cabinet, panel and controls with a soft dry cloth, or a soft cloth lightly
• Ventilation holes are provided to prevent the unit from overheating. Be careful moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent, such as
not to obstruct them with other units or by covering the unit with a cloth, etc. alcohol or benzine, which may damage the finish.
• If the unit malfunctions or if a foreign body falls into the cabinet, disconnect the
AC power cord immediately and consult your Sony service facility or your Sony
dealer.
Installation
• Avoid placing the unit in a location subject to:
— mechanical vibration
— high humidity
— excessive dust
— direct or excessive sunlight
— extremely high or low temperatures
• Do not use other electronic equipment near the unit. The unit will not work
properly in strong electromagnetic fields.
• Do not place a heavy object such as a monitor on the printer.
Condensation
• If the printer is subject to wide or sudden changes in temperature, such as when it
is moved from a cold room to a warm room or when it is left in a room with a
heater that tends to produce large amounts of moisture, condensation may form
inside the printer. In such cases the printer will probably not work properly, and
may even develop a fault if you persist in using it. If condensation forms, turn off
the power and leave the printer to stand for at least one hour.
• If the printing pack is subjected to wide or sudden changes in temperature,
condensation may form on the ink ribbon or paper. This will cause the printer to
malfunction. Also, if the printing pack is used in this state, spots are likely to
appear on the printout. Therefore, avoid storing the printing pack in locations
subject to wide or sudden changes of temperature.
• To store a half-used printing pack, replace it in its original packing and reseal the
package. If possible, keep the sealed printing pack in a cool, dark location. To
subsequently use the printing pack, place it, in its sealed package, in a warm
room for several hours. Doing so prevents condensation from forming when the
printing pack is removed from its package.
1-61
120 Others Others 121

1-62
Ink Ribbon and Paper Specifications
Both paper and an ink ribbon cartridge are necessary for printing. Use the ink Power requirements Input connectors
ribbon with the paper contained in the same package. UP-51MDP: 220 to 240 V AC, RGB SYNC (analog RGB signal):
50/60 Hz BNC connector × 4
UPC-510 Color Printing Pack UP-50/51MDU: 100 to 120 V AC, RGB: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohm
Contains color ink ribbon cartridge and paper. 50/60 Hz termination switch set to ON)
Color ink ribbon cartridge 1 roll UP-51MD: 100 to 120/220 to 240 SYNC: 0.3 to 4 Vp-p
A-5 (5 3⁄4 × 8 3⁄8 inches) size paper 200 sheets V AC, 50/60 Hz SYNC ON G: Automatic
Power consumption discrimination
Self-laminating Color Printing Pack UPC-540 UP-51MDP: About 1.2 A max. at 75 ohms (75 ohm termination
Contains an ink ribbon cartridge and paper for automatic laminate coating. 25°C, 240 V AC switch set to ON), sync
Color ink ribbon cartridge 1 roll UP-50/51MDU: About 2.8 A max. negative
A-5 size paper 102 sheets at 25°C, 120 V AC S VIDEO (Separate luminance (Y)
UP-51MD: About 2.8 A max. at and chrominance (C) signals):
Notes 25°C, 120 V AC 4-pin mini-DIN × 1
• Use only the ink ribbon cartridge and paper designed for use with this printer. If About 1.2 A max. at 25°C, Y: 1 Vp-p
you use a different type, the printer may not print properly or malfunction. 240 V AC C: For NTSC/EIA standards:
• Use the ink ribbon with the paper contained in the same package. Not doing so Operating temperature 0.29 Vp-p color burst
may result in degradation of the print picture quality and occurrence of a trouble. 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F) For PAL B.G.I standards:
If the printer detects an incompatible combination, an error message appears in Operating humidity 0.3 Vp-p color burst
the printer window display. 20 % to 80 % (no condensation 75 ohms (terminated), sync
• Ink ribbon and paper are not reusable. Once exhausted, replace them with new allowed) negative
ones. Storage and transport temperature VIDEO (NTSC composite video
When you use the UPC-510 Color Printing Pack, 200 sheets of printouts can be –20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F) signal for NTSC/EIA standards
printed for one ink ribbon roll. Even if you finish one pack of paper containing Storage and transport humidity and PAL composite video
100 sheets, do not throw away the ink ribbon. You can use the ink ribbon for an 20 % to 90 % (no condensation signal for PAL B.G.I
another pack of papers. allowed) standards): BNC connector × 1
Dimensions About 370 × 125 × 490 mm 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (75 ohm
(w/h/d) termination switch set to ON),
(14 5⁄8 × 5 × 19 3⁄8 inches) sync negative
Mass About 14.5 kg (31 lb 15 oz) AC IN (for power input)
Printing system Output connectors
Sublimation heat transfer printing RGB SYNC (analog RGB signal):
Thermal head 11.6 dot/mm (2048 dots) BNC connector × 4
Total gradation RGB: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohm
256 levels each for yellow, termination switch set to ON)
magenta, and cyan SYNC: 1 Vp-p
Printing time Approximately 20 seconds (at 75 ohms (terminated), sync
color printing at high speed) negative
TV system Selectable with the NTSC/PAL S VIDEO (Separate luminance (Y)
selector (for UP-50/51MD/ and chrominance (C) signals):
51MDP) 4-pin mini-DIN × 1
In NTSC mode: NTSC/EIA Y: 1 Vp-p
standards C: For NTSC/EIA standards:
In PAL mode: PAL B.G.I 0.29 Vp-p color burst

standards For PAL B.G.I standards:
0.3 Vp-p color burst
75 ohms (75 ohm termination
switch set to ON), sync
negative

Specifications (Continued)
VIDEO (NTSC composite video Medical Specifications (for UP-51MD/51MDU/ When IMMED. CAP. is set to OFF When IMMED. CAP. is set to ON
signal for NTSC/EIA standards 51MDP)
and PAL composite video Protection against electric shock: V-SYNC 0 1 6 7 8 V-SYNC 0 1 2 3 8
signal for PAL B.G.I Class I
Captured image
standards) BNC connector × 1 Protection against harmful ingress Captured image
vRP Remote vRP
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (terminated), of water: Remote
control pulse
control pulse tRPE tRPE
sync negative Ordinary signal tRPW
signal
tRPW
Controls connectors Degree of safety in the presence of
REMOTE 1 : special mini jack × 1 flammable anesthetics or
Notation Parameter MIN TYP MAX Unit Remarks
For RM-5500 Remote Control oxygen:
Notation Parameter MIN TYP MAX Unit Remarks tRPE Time within 3 – 10 msec –
Unit (not supplied) Not suitable for use in the
tRPE Time within 3 – 12 msec – which a
REMOTE 2 (automatic printing presence of flammable which a remote control
connector): Stereo mini jack : anesthetics or oxygen remote control pulse should
×1 Mode of operation: pulse should be cleared to
be cleared to zero.
For RM-91 Remote Control Continuous
zero. tRPW Length of a 100 – – msec –
Unit and FS-36 Foot Switch
tRPW Length of a 100 – – msec – remote control
REMOTE 3 (automatic printing Using the automatic printing capabilities remote control pulse.
connector): D-SUB 9-pin (REMOTE 2/REMOTE 3) pulse. VRP Amplitude of a – – 5 V This value
connector: × 1 For FS-30 Foot If you send remote control pulse signals illustrated VRP Amplitude of a – – 5 V This value remote control is based
Switch (not supplied) through the REMOTE 2 or REMOTE 3 connector, remote control is based pulse. on TTL
pulse. on TTL standards.
(See “Selecting the Operation the printer is remotely controlled according to the
standards.
Mode for Automatic Printing remote control setting. (See page 104.)
Note
Capabilities” page 104) Turn on the power of the printer and display the The above example shows that the images at the
RS-232C (Computer control source image on the monitor screen. Send a This mode is effective only when the source image
seventh and eighth positions are captured. is displayed on the monitor screen. If the memory
interface): D-SUB 25-pin remote control pulse signal at the timing shown However, images at another positions could be
connector × 1 below. image is displayed, the image will not be captured
captured depending on the printer mode and even if the pulse is sent to the printer. Be sure to
Output: 5 kilohms at load The timing depends on the setting on item printer settings.
Typical ± 8 V IMMED. CAP of the FUNCTION SETUP menu. display the source image when sending the pulse.
Input: 5-kilohm load
Note CAPTURE timing pulse for REMOTE 3
High level 5 to 15 V Note
When AUTO LIVE of the FUNCTION SETUP
Low level –5 to –15 V The remote control pulse signal examples menu is set to OFF, the memory image is Input equivalent circuit
Supplied accessories introduced here are one example of typical displayed on the screen after the image is captured
Color printing pack (1) operation timing. The timing may be affected due in memory. In such a case, whenever you capture 5V
Ink ribbon holder (1) to the memory page selected and print type. an image, press the SOURCE/MEMORY button
Paper tray (1)
so that the source image appears on the video 10K
Paper cover (1) CAPTURE timing pulse for REMOTE 2 monitor. Displaying the memory image does not FL 33Ω
AC power cord (1)
allow you to capture the image with the correct
Warranty card (1) REMOTE 2 connector pin assignment: timing.
(for UP-50/51MD/51MDU)
Instructions for Use (1) GND
Optional accessories BUSY
Output equivalent circuit
MIN
UPC-510 Color Printing Pack
UPC-540 Self-laminating Color FL2 FL1 FL
Printing Pack
CN5
1
2
3
1-63

1-64
Specifications (Continued) Error/Warning Messages

Pin assignment There are two kinds of messages: error messages and warning messages. This
section lists these messages together with their possible causes and remedies. Note
Pin Signal Remarks the messages and act accordingly.
1 A (Input) TTL level
2
3
B
C
(Input)
(Input)
TTL level
TTL level
Error Messages
4 Reserved (Input) TTL level
If a problem occurs, the ALARM lamp lights orange and an error message stating
5 Capture (Input) TTL level the problem appears on the monitor and in the printer window display.
6 GND – – In the error message introduced in the following tables, “nn” indicates the number
7 VD output (Output) TTL level or symbol displayed in the actual message.
8 Light (Output) TTL level
9 Busy (Output) TTL level Message Possible cause and remedies
On the video monitor In the printer window
Input: Input the signal at the low level for more display
than 100 msec. INSERT RIBBON INSERT RIBBON The ink ribbon cartridge is not loaded.
VD OUTPUT: The VD of the input signal t Load the ink ribbon cartridge. (See page 9.)
currently selected is output. SET PAPER SET PAPER • Paper has been exhausted.
Light: A high level signal is output when the RIBBON REMAIN 100 RIBBON REMAIN 100 t Load the paper. (See page 12.)
printer is capturing the image in memory. • The paper tray is not installed.
Busy: A high level signal is output when the t Install the paper tray. (See page 12.)
printer can capture an image and can print. • When RIBBON REMAIN 0 is displayed, replace the
A low level signal is output when the printer ink ribbon. (See page 9.)
cannot capture a) the image, when the printer INSERT RIBBON AND PAPER INSERT RIBBON An ink ribbon cartridge and paper are not loaded.
cannot print, or when the printer neither can SET PAPER t Load the ink ribbon cartridge and paper. (See pages
capture the image or print. 9 and 12.)
REMOVE PRINTS REMOVE PRINTS The maximum number of printouts has accumulated on
a) When the printer cannot capture the image: When an input the paper cover.
signal already exists in the printer and the user wants to t Remove the printouts from the paper cover.
capture the image in a certain memory location, but
REMOVE PAPER: TRAY REMOVE PAPER The paper jams around the paper tray as it is being fed
cannot because the image stored in that memory location
TRAY into the ribbon area.
is being printed.
t Remove any jammed paper. (See page 129.)
Note CHECK RIBBON CHECK RIBBON nn • The ink ribbon has torn.
When AUTO LIVE of the FUNCTION SETUP t Repair the torn ink ribbon. (See page 12.)
menu is set to OFF, the memory image is • An ink ribbon cartridge that can not be used with this
printer has been loaded.
displayed on the screen after the image is captured
in memory. In such a case, whenever you store the t Load the appropriate ink ribbon cartridge.
image, press the SOURCE/MEMORY button so • The ink ribbon has been exhausted.
that the source image appears on the video t Replace the old one with a new ink ribbon
monitor. Displaying the memory image does not cartridge. (See page 9.) (The ink ribbon cannot be
reused.)
allow you to capture the image with the correct
PAPER JAMMING PAPER JAMMING nn The paper has jammed inside the printer.
timing.
t Check the position where paper has jammed and
remove any jammed paper from the printer. (See

page 129.)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.

Error/Warning Messages (Continued)
Message Possible cause and remedies Warning message Possible causes and remedies
On the video monitor In the printer window On the monitor In the printer window
display display
END OF RIBBON END OF RIBBON The ink ribbon has been exhausted. NO INPUT NO INPUT The printer is not receiving an input signal from
t Replace the old one with a new ink ribbon cartridge. equipment corresponding to the input selected on the
INPUT SETUP menu.
(See page 9.) (The ink ribbon cannot be reused.)
MECHA TROUBLE: HEAD t Check the input signal selected on the INPUT
MECHA TROUBLE nn • The ink ribbon cartridge is not loaded correctly
SETUP menu. (See page 14.)
HEAD t Check the ink ribbon cartridge and load it
t Check whether the video equipment is outputting a
correctly. (See page 9.)
video signal in playback mode.
• The paper has jammed inside the printer.
t Check that the connections between the signal
t Check the position where paper has jammed and source equipment and the printer are secure. (See
remove any jammed paper from the printer. (See page 74.)
page 129.) NO IMAGE NO IMAGE The image is not captured in memory.
MECHA TROUBLE: TRAY MECHA TROUBLE nn The paper tray has moved out of position.
t Capture the image in memory then start printing.
TRAY t Contact your Sony service facility or your Sony (See page 19.)
dealer to clear the error status. PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT In the selected memory page, the captured image is
MECHA TROUBLE: PLATEN MECHA TROUBLE nn The paper has jammed inside the printer. being printed or queued.
PRINTING MEMORY PRINTING MEMORY
PLATEN t Check the position where paper has jammed and t Retry the operation once the printer finishes printing.
MECHA TROUBLE: LOAD MECHA TROUBLE nn remove any jammed paper from the printer. (See PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT
page 129.) The thermal head has overheated.
LOAD PAPER HEAD IN COOLING HEAD IN COOLING t Leave the printer until the head cools down and this
MECHA TROUBLE: EJECT MECHA TROUBLE nn message disappears. The printer starts printing
automatically.
EJECT PAPER
PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT The thermal head is being heated.
MECHA TROUBLE: CHUCK MECHA TROUBLE nn
HEAD IN HEATING HEAD IN HEATING t Wait until this message disappears. The printer
CHUCK starts printing automatically.
PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT The printer is printing, preventing any other operation.
NOW PRINTING NOW PRINTING t Wait until the printer finishes printing, then retry the
Warning Messages operation.
In case of a warning, only warning messages appear. The ALARM lamp does not
light.
If the Paper Jams
If the paper jams after pressing the PRINT button, the message stating that paper
Warning message Possible causes and remedies has jammed appears on the video monitor and in the printer window display.
On the monitor In the printer window Follow the steps below to remove the jammed paper.
display
HIT ANY KEY HIT ANY KEY This message appears when the remote control unit is
used in CAP-STOP (CAPTURE STOP) mode and when
1 Open the front panel.
the printer stops capturing images once images have
been captured to all memory pages (to the last point of
the last memory page).
PAGE MEMORY
t Press any button. Printer operation is enabled after

this.
INPUT MISMATCH INPUT MISMATCH • The TV system of the signal input from the source
equipment (VTR, video camera and so on) is not
compatible with the TV system of your printer.
t Check the signal of the TV system and input the Continue to the next page c
correct one.
• An signal other than a video signal (such as an audio
signal, etc.) is input.
t Input the correct video signal.
1-65

1-66
Error/Warning Messages (Continued) Troubleshooting
2 Remove the paper cover. The following troubleshooting checks will help you correct the most common
If any printouts have been ejected onto the paper cover and have accumulated problems you may encounter with your unit. Before proceeding with these trouble
on the paper cover, remove them before removing the paper cover. checks, first check that the power cord is firmly connected. Should the problem
persist, unplug the unit and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
service facility.
Symptoms Possible causes and remedies

Nothing appears on the • The POWER switch of the printer is not set to ON.
video monitor even if t Set the POWER switch of the printer to ON.
you press any of the • The POWER switch of the video monitor is not set to ON.
3 Check whether any paper is jammed inside the printer. If you find a jammed operation buttons. t Set the POWER switch of the monitor to ON.
• Connections may not be correct.
sheet, slowly pull it into the paper tray. t Check connections and rectify, if necessary. (See page 75.)
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
No message appears An incorrect signal is input.
on the regular screen. t Select another input signal by pressing the INPUT SELECT button. (See page 14.) Or,
set the connected video equipment to playback mode, if it is currently set to another
mode such as stop mode.
t In this case, first check the video monitor by pressing the SOURCE/MEMORY button to
display the image stored in memory. If an image appears, the monitor is working
correctly.
No message or image • If an image captured in memory appears when the SOURCE/MEMORY button is pressed,
appears on the regular SOURCE on the OUTPUT SETUP menu is set to THRU.
Note
screen. t Change the SOURCE setting to EE. (See page 84.)
Never attempt to pull a piece of jammed paper down, up, backwards, or • When the menu is displayed by pressing the MENU button, the DISPLAY setting of the
forwards, the paper may tangle or tear. video monitor is set to OFF.
t Set the DISPLAY setting to ON by pressing the DISPLAY button. (See page 68.)
4 Remove the paper tray. No message appears
in the printer window
• The contrast of the printer display window is not set correctly.
t Adjust the brightness of the printer window display using the LCD. CNTR. item on the
display. SYSTEM OUTPUT menu. (See page 110.)
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
• The contrast of the printer display window is set to OFF.
t Adjust the brightness of the printer window display using the LCD. CNTR. item on the
SYSTEM OUTPUT menu. (See page 110.)
The printer does not print. • An error message appears on the display.
t Perform the steps described in “Error/Warning Messages” on page 127.
• Paper that cannot be used with this printer has been loaded.
t Load the correct paper. Use only ink ribbons and paper for this printer. (See page
122.)
5 Load the paper into the paper tray correctly.
• The paper is not loaded correctly.
t Check which side of the paper is the printing side, then load the paper again. (See
• Do not reuse the paper put back in step 3. Discard that paper. page 12.)
• Use only paper recommended in this manual. A black line appears on Any portion for which there is no signal is printed in black.
the printout. t Shift the printout area. Capture a new image and print it. (See page 96.)
The printer produces a Any portion for which there is no signal is printed in black.
printout with a black frame. t Make the printout size narrower. Capture a new image and print it. (See page 96.)
Set the paper The printed image is Only part of the video signal has been stored.
securely partially cut out.
under the tab.
t Make the printout size wider. (See page 96.) Capture a new image and print it.
The printout is blurred. A quickly moving image has been stored.
t Set the memory mode to FIELD by using the MEMORY FRM/FLD button, then print it.
(See page 33.)
6
Re-insert the removed paper tray and paper cover, then close the front panel. The printout color is very The paper is not loaded correctly.
pale. t Check which side of the paper is the printing side, then load the paper again. (See page
12.)

Troubleshooting (Continued) Location and Function of Parts and Controls
Symptoms Possible causes and remedies For details, refer to the pages given in parentheses.
The ink ribbon cartridge An ink ribbon cartridge that can not be used with this printer is used.
cannot be inserted. t Insert the appropriate ink ribbon cartridge. (page 9)
The video monitor screen The 75-ohm termination switch is set to the wrong position. Main Panel
is too bright and the t Set 75-ohm termination swtich to the correct position. (page 74)
contrast in the light
area is weakened.
The video monitor
screen is dark.

PAGE MEMORY
POWER
ALARM PRINT
1 ! POWER switch 6 CAPTURE button (18, 26, 44, 51, 52,

Press to turn the printer on or off. 100)
Press to capture an image in a memory page.
2 Printer window display
Displays messages that also appear along the 7 PRINT button (19, 26, 51, 53, 63)
bottom edge of the monitor screen. Also Press to make a printout.
displays the menu screen line at which the
cursor is positioned. If an error occurs, a 8 Paper ejection slot
corresponding error message is displayed. The printout is ejected here.
The contrast of the printer window display
can be adjusted on the SYSTEM SETUP 9 PRINT lamp
menu. Also, the printer window display can Lights while the printer is printing.
be cleared on the SYSTEM SETUP menu.
0 ALARM lamp (127)
3 Remote sensor Lights in orange when the ink ribbon or paper
Aim the head of the remote control unit is exhausted, the paper jams, or another
toward this sensor. problem occurs.
4 MEMORY PAGE button (26, 39, 67) qa Front door

Press to select the memory page. Pull the top on the front door toward you to
open it.
5 SOURCE/MEMORY button (44, 67, 78, Opening the front panel reveals the sub panel
98) buttons, ink ribbon cartridge, paper tray and
Press to select which signal is to be output to paper cover.
the monitor.
The memory image and source image are
toggled each time you press this button.
1-67

1-68
Location and Function of Parts and Controls (Continued)
When the front panel is open A EJECT button (10) on the PRINTER SETUP menu changes 0 CAPTION ON/OFF button (63)
Press to eject the ink ribbon cartridge. linked with this button setting. You can Used to determine whether a caption is printed
change the number even when the printer is on the printout. To make a printout with a
A B C B Ink ribbon cartridge (9, 71) printing. caption, press this button to display ON. To
POWER
MEMORY
PAGE
SOURCE/
MEMORY
CAPTURE PRINT
Insert the ink ribbon cartridge. make a printout without a caption, press this
5 RIBBON REMAIN button (20, 69 ) button to display OFF.
C Paper cover (71) Press this button to display the type and the
Paper is ejected onto this cover. number of printouts that can still be made on qa CLEAR button (66, 67)
the regular screen. To not display them, press Press this button to clear the images captured
D Paper tray (13, 71) this button again. The setting of RBN in the memory pages. Which images can be
E D Load paper into this tray. REMAIN on the OUTPUT SETUP menu cleared with the CLEAR button depends on
changes linked with this button setting. the setting made with the FUNCTION SETUP
E Sub panel keys menu.
For details, see “Sub Panel” 6 INPUT SELECT button (14) When the clear function of this button is set to
Press this button to select the input signal on OFF, the buzzer sounds if you press the
the regular screen. When you press this button, CLEAR button.
Sub Panel the currently selected input signal is displayed
for about three seconds. To select the input qs EXEC button (57, 91, 97, 101, 117, 118,
signal, release the button while the desired 119)
input signal is displayed. Each time you press Press this button to execute the values set with
this button, the input signal is switched in the the COLOR ADJUST menu or to recall a user
order of VIDEO, RGB, S-VIDEO, RGB... set in the PRINTER SETUP menu and to
register the user set in the SYSTEM SETUP
7 MEMORY FRM/FLD button (18, 33) menu. Also, this button is used to enter the
Press this button to select the memory mode characters of a caption in the CAPTION
on the regular screen. When you press this menu.
button, the currently selected memory mode is
displayed for about three seconds. To select qd Cursor keys
the memory mode, release the button while the Use to select a desired item from the menu.
desired memory mode is displayed. Each time Also, these keys are used to position the
you press this button, the memory mode is cursor (green pointer ) on the regular screen
switched in the order of FRAME, FIELD, when capturing mulitple reduced images.
FRAME.
To make a printout of a captured image which qf INPUT SETUP button (16, 79)
is blurred, set the memory mode to FIELD and Press this button to display the INPUT SETUP
1 MENU button 3 MULTI PICTURE button (36, 52) eliminate the blur by pressing this button, and menu on the regular screen.
Press this button to display or clear the menus Press this button to select the desired printout then make a printout.
on the screen and printer window displays. type on the regular screen. When you press qg DISPLAY button (20, 68, 100)
this button, the currently selected printout 8 MOTION CHECK button (46, 47) When the regular screen is displayed, pressing
2 LOAD USER button (21, 118, 119) type is displayed for about three seconds. Press this button to select the mode on the this button toggles the screen display on and
Press this button to recall a registered user set. Each time you press this button, the type is regular screen to check whether the memory off of (messages such as, Q1, A, etc.)
Pressing this button causes the currently switched in the order of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 1.... images are blurred when you captured two- or regardless of the setting of the DISPLAY item
selected user set to be is displayed for about The setting of MULTIPIX on the LAYOUT four-reduced images. Each time you press this
in the OUTPUT SETUP menu. The setting of

three seconds. To recall another user set, SETUP menu changes linked with this button button, the type is switched in the order of DISPLAY in the OUTPUT SETUP menu
release the button while the desired user set setting. ON, OFF, ON... changes linked with this button.
number is displayed. Each time you press this The setting of MOTION CHK on the When the menu is displayed, pressing this
button, user set is switched in the order of 1, 4 PRINT QTY (quantity) button (23) PRINTER SETUP menu changes linked with button temporarily clears the menu display.
2, 3. Press this button to set the number of copies this button setting. While this button is held down, the menu
on the regular screen. You can set any number display disappears.
9 CAPTION INPUT button (56)
up to 9. When you press this button, the
Press this button to display or clear the
currently selected number is displayed for
CAPTION menu on the regular screen.
about three seconds. The setting of PRT QTY
qh R/G/B/D/L button (86) currently selected LOAD COLOR number to 5 NTSC/PAL (NTSC/PAL TV) selector (74, 8 REMOTE 3 connector (D-SUB 9-pin)
Press this button to display or clear the be displayed for about three seconds. Three 75) (only for models other than UP- (76)
COLOR ADJUST menu on the regular kinds of LOAD COLOR numbers are 51MDU) Used to connect the FS-30 Foot Switch. Or
screen. available for the currently selected user set. To Set this selector according to the TV system of input remote control pulse signals for
select the desired LOAD COLOR number, the input signal. If you change this setting, automatic printing.
qj LOAD COLOR button (87) release the button while the desired LOAD turn the printer power off, then back on again.
Press this button to recall the values set for the COLOR number is displayed. Selector position When 9 RS-232C connector (76)
printout color (color intensity and color The selected LOAD COLOR number in the NTSC The NTSC system video Used to connect the computer to control the
contrast). Pressing this button causes the COLOR ADJUST menu changes linked with equipment is connected. printer. For details, contact your nearest Sony
this button. PAL The PAL system video dealer.
equipment is connected.
0 - AC IN connector
Rear 6 REMOTE 1 connector (special mini Used to connect the printer to a wall outlet
jack) (76) with the supplied power cord.
Used to connect the RM-5500 Remote Control
Unit (not supplied) to be used as a wired qa T OUTPUT connectors (75)
remote control unit. Used to connect the video monitor.
Refer to “Important safeguards/notices for use
7 REMOTE 2 connector (stereo mini in the medical environment” for UP-51MD/
jack) (76) 51MDU/51MDP on page 2.
Used to connect the RM-91 Remote Control Connector Connectable equipment
Unit (not supplied), or the FS-36 Foot Switch.
S-VIDEO Video monitor with Y/C separated
input connector.
VIDEO Video monitor with composite video
signal input connector
RGB SYNC Video monitor with RGB/SYNC input
connectors.
Comparing the Printer Window Display with the Video

Monitor Display
1 t INPUT (input signal) connectors (74) 3 75 Ω ON/OFF termination switch (74)
Used to connect the video equipment Provided for the NTSC composite video You can operate the printer using either the printer window display or the video
supplying the source image. signal in NTSC mode and PAL composite monitor display. The printer window display has a narrower display range and show
video signal in PAL mode. only a limited number of characters. Use whichever method you prefer.
Connector Connectable equipment
Normally set this switch to ON. Set it to OFF
S-VIDEO Video equipment with Y/C separated
output connector if the input signal should drop when you Regular screen
VIDEO Video equipment with composite video
connect additional equipment to the video
signal output connector equipment. COLOR : 200
RGB SYNC Video equipment with RGB/SYNC

output connectors 4 Equipotential ground terminal connector
Used to connect to the equipotential plug to COL OR : 2 0 0
2 75 Ω ON/OFF termination switch (74) bring the various parts of a system to the same Q1 A 4F : 1 S
Provided for the RGB input. potential.
Normally set this switch to ON. Set it to OFF Refer to “Important safeguards/notices for use Q1 A 4F:1 S
if the input signal should drop when you in the medical environments” for UP-51MD/
connect additional equipment to the video 51MDU/51MDP on page 2.
equipment.
1-69

1-70
Monitor Display Menu screen tree chart

WINDOW SETUP menu
(96)
The menu screen
There are two types of display: a regular screen display and a menu screen WINDOW SETUP COLOR : 200
configuration is shown LAY SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
display. The two types of display are explained using the monitor display. H START : 0 DOT (S)
using a tree-chart. For V START : 0 DOT (S)
H WIDTH : 896 DOTS
details, refer to the pages COLOR ADJUST menu V WIDTH : 464 DOT (S)
Regular screen display indicated in ( ). (86) SAVE
CANCEL
: PRESS [ EXEC ]
: PRESS [ EXEC ]
When you first turn on the printer, the regular screen message appears. LOAD COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 TEMP
Q1 A 1 S
CYN – RED : 0
MAG – GR N : 0
1: Indicates that full-size image and the YEL – BLU : 0
DARK : 0 CAPTION menu (55, 57)
STANDARD mode are selected. LIGHT
SHARPNESS : 8
: 0
CAPTION OFF 1
4: Indicates that four-reduced images and the INTERPOL. : OFF / ON ____________________
C SAVE COLOR : 1 / 2 / 3 [EXEC] ____________________
STANDARD mode are selected Q1 A 1 S ____________________
____________________
16F: Indicates that 16-reduced images with LAYOUT SETUP menu ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
white borders and the STANDARD mode are (34, 37, 49, 53, 114) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=%
’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
selected. When SEPARATE (image with LAYOUT SETUP COLOR : 200
!?&/ * #$¥£@~| ^
white borders) is set to ON on the LAYOUT MEMORY
MULTI PIX
: FRAME / FIELD
: 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Q1 A 1 S
SETUP menu, F is attached. SEPARATE : OFF / ON
SYSTEM SETUP menu (31,
MIRROR : OFF / MIRROR
DUP1: Indicates that full-size image and the Regular screen
Q1 A 16: 9 S LAMINATION : GLOSSY / 81, 110, 111, 112, 116)
DUPLICATE mode are selected. CAPTION : PRESS [ > ] SYSTEM SETUP COLOR : 200
DUP4: Indicates that four-reduced images LCD - CNTR : 7
Q1 A 1 S BAUDRATE : / 24 / 48 / 9600
and the DUPLICATE mode are selected. BEEP : OFF / ON
PRINTER SETUP menu APPLI. : STANDARD /
IRE : 100 / 11 / 12 / 13
1 C (Caption) display section (24, 29, 40, 48, 92) SAVE USER : 1 / 2 / 3 [ EXEC ]
C is displayed in white when the printer is set PRINTER SETUP COLOR : 200 USER NAME : PRESS [ > ]
to print a caption. PRINT QTY. : 1 [ 1 ~ 9 ]
Q1 A 1 S
Q1 A 1 S INTERVAL : OFF / ON
Q1 A 16: 9 S USER NAME input menu
PRN SPEED : / HIGH
2 Message display section MOTION CHK : OFF / ON (116)
Messages are displayed. SYSTEM : PRESS [ > ] USER NAME 1
FUNCTION : PRESS [ > ] ____________________
3 Ink ribbon type and remaining amount of a: Indicates the type of printout
Q1 A 1 S
INPUT SETUP menu ABCDEFGHIJKLMN

ink ribbon display section b: Indicates the position where the cursor is currently O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SHIFT
placed and where an image will be captured. (16, 78) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+-=%
Displays the ink ribbon type and the ’ ” , . ; : ( ) [ ] { } <‘ >
#$¥£@~| ^
remaining amount of ribbon (indicates the 6 Memory page display section / COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT /
!?&/ * INS DEL SP EXIT
number of printouts that can still be made Indicates the currently selected memory page. HUE : 0
COLOR : 0
with the ribbon) when the ribbon remaining While the image in the memory page is being GAIN : 0 FUNCTION SETUP menu
display function is set to ON. OFFSET : 0 (42, 64, 104, 105)
printed, the memory page indication blinks in AGC : OFF / ON
green. The memory page whose memory PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
4 S or M (image type) display section image is queued to be printed blinks in white. Q1 A 1 S
Indicates the type of image being displayed RM2 FUNC : / C&PRINT /
on the monitor screen. 7 Q (print quantity) display OUTPUT SETUP menu RM3A FUNC : / PRINT&PAGE +
(68, 69, 76, 83, 84)
S (Source): The image from the input signal Indicates the number of copies to be printed. RM3C FUNC : / CAP_SRC
RM3E FUNC : / CAPTURE
/
/
This item blinks while the printer is busy.
/ COL / LAY / PRN / IN / OUT / CLEAR : / ALL /

source is displayed on the screen. DISPLAY : OFF / ON
RBN REMAIN: OFF / ON Q1 A 1 S
M (Memory): The image stored in memory is 8 Printer setting status display section SOURCE : THRU / EE
displayed on the screen. The corresponding currently selected status is SYNC ON G : OFF / ON
MONI C – B : 0 COLOR BALANCE menu (98)
MONI M – G : 0
displayed when one of the LOAD USER, MONI Y – B : 0 COLOR BALANCE COLOR : 200
5 Printer operation mode display section LOAD COLOR, MULTI PICTURE, PRINT PRN SETUP : PRESS [ > ]
BAL X : 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
Indicates the printer application mode QTY, INPUT SELECT, MEMORY FRM/ Q1 A 1 S BAL Y
BA L STEP
: 50 [1 – 50 – 99]
: 05 [1 – 20]
(STANDARD or DUPLICATE) or type of FLD, DISPLAY, RIBBON REMAIN or TEST PRINT : PRESS [EXEC]
printouts such as multiple reduced images. CAPTION ON/OFF buttons is pressed.

Examples:
Q1 A 1 S
Index
A, B D L Precautions Printouts T to W
Accessories (supplied) 71 Deleting the images stored in Lamination pattern cleaning 121 with a black line 96 Troubleshooting 131
Adjusting memory pages selecting 114 condensation 120 with black frame 96 User set
brightness of the printer window deleting all images stored in the self-laminating color printing installation 120 partially cut 96 printing with the desired user set
display 110 printer 66 pack 122 safety 120 notes on storing 20 21
color balance 98 deleting images in a certain LOAD COLOR number transportation 121 Printouts variations 7, 28 recalling 21, 118
color of the input signal 83 memory page 67 recalling 91 Print quantity setting 23 Pulse signals 125 registering 116
color of the printer’s output setting the function of the storing 91 PRINTER SETUP menu 23, 30, Using the automatic printing
signal 72 CLEAR button to be used for Loading an ink ribbon cartridge 9 41, 48, 49 capabilities 104
level of the input signal 81 deleting images 64 Loading paper 12 Printing R, S Warning messages 128
interpolation 90 Display Location and function of parts and at high speed 19 Remote control unit (not supplied)
printout area 96 erasing screen display 73 controls eliminating the blur 18 foot switch 73, 76, 104
printout color 86 monitor display 138 main panel 133 if a black line appears on the remote control unit 73, 76, 104
printout size 96 type and remaining amount of the monitor display 138 printout 20 Safety precautions 120
printout tone 92 ink ribbon 69 rear 136 if the image quality of printouts is Screen display
sharpness of the printout 89 sub panel 134 not satisfactory 20 erasing 68
Assembly 72 Location precautions 121 if the paper runs out during erasing menu temporarily 69
Automatic printing E printing 25 Selecting the input signal 14
pulse signal 124 if the printer does not print 19 Setting up the printer with menu
Eliminating the blur 18
if the stored image is blurred 18 adjusting the printer window
selecting operation mode 104 Entering a caption M, N, O
Baud rate for computer making a full-size image display brightness 110
adding characters mid ways 60 Memory page
communication 113 printout 17 adjusting the printout color 86
entering a caption 57 selecting the memory page 39
Blur making a printout of multiple adjusting the sharpness 89
entering a space 60 usable memory page 38
checking blur from the memory reduced images 35 changing the printout area/
replacing a previously entered Menu
image 96 making a printout of identical printout size 94
character 60 CAPTION menu 55, 57
eliminating from the printout 18 reduced images 50 compensating for the input
when you enter a wrong COLOR ADJUST menu 86
making a printout of a mirror signal 78
character 59 COLOR BALANCE menu 98
image 53 displaying the type and remaining
Error messages 127 FUNCTION SETUP menu 42,
making a printout with amount of the ink ribbon 69
C 64, 104, 105
a caption 63 erasing the screen display 68
Caption INPUT SETUP menu 16, 78
making a printout with selecting operation mode for
CAPTION menu 55 F, G, H LAYOUT SETUP menu 34, 37,
an insert 52
entering 57 49, 53, 114 automatic printing
Foot switch 73, 76, 104 making printouts with white
making a printout with OUTPUT SETUP menu 68, 69, capabilities 104
Full-size image printout borders 49
a caption 63 76, 83, 84 selecting whether to enable the
making 17 printing remotely 73
Changing the printout size/printout PRINTER SETUP menu 23, 30, operation and error tones 112
setting 36 selecting the memory page 39
area 94 41, 48, 49 setting baud rate for computer
FUNCTION SETUP menu 42, 64, selecting the printout type 35
Cleaning 121 SYSTEM SETUP menu 31, 81, communication 113
104, 105 storing another images while
COLOR ADJUST menu 86 110, 111, 112, 116 setting the lamination pattern 114
printing 26 Sharpness 89
COLOR BALANCE menu 98 USER NAME input menu 116
Printing pack 122 Specifications 123
Color printing pack 122 I, J, K WINDOW SETUP menu 96
Printout area 96 Supplied accessories
Condensation precautions 120 Ink ribbon and paper 122 Menu screen tree chart 139
Printout color assembly 72
Connections Ink Ribbon cartridge Mirror image 53
color intensity 88 supplied accessories 71
for enabling remote control 76 loading 9 Monitor display 138
contrast 89 System configuration 8
for storing video images 74 if your ink ribbon should tear 12 Output signal of the printer 83
interpolation for the image System overview 7
for viewing images to be printed notes on storing 12 data 90 SYSTEM SETUP menu 31, 81,
on the video monitor 75 removing 9 LOAD COLOR number 86 110, 111, 112, 116
Installation precautions 120 P, Q sharpness 89
Paper Printout size 96
ink ribbon and paper 122 Printout quality
loading 12 adjusting the printout color 86
notes on storing 13 adjusting the sharpness 89
removing the jammed paper 129 compensating for the input
Paper jams 129 signals 78
eliminating the blur 18
1-71

Printed in Japan
Sony Corporation
1-72 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1
Section 2
Service Information
2-1. Main Parts Location
2-1-1. Main Block Location 2-1-2. Board Location
Ribbon supply motor SY-282 board SU-55 board

Stepping motor Head motor SU-52 board
Ribbon IF-767 board
take-up motor SU-56 board
Thermal VPR-63 board
head Switching AN-15 board
DC regulator IF-764 board
fans (1)
SE-555
board
Tray
motor SE-539 board
SE-557 board
LCD module SU-53 board
Paper feed motor
PRT-13 board SU-54 board
Mechanical block
SE-556 board
Paper feed assembly
SE-541 board
SE-544 board
SE-545 board
SE-548 board
SE-546 board
SE-547 board
SE-553 board
SE-554 board
SE-552 board
SE-542 board
SE-540 board
SE-551 board
SE-550 board
n
For the names and function description of each sensor
board, refer to “Section 5 Mechanical Operation
Description”.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-1

2-2. Removal and Installation of Cabinet 6. Remove the two screws (PSW 3 x 6) and one screw
(BVTT 3 x 6).
2-2-1. Top Cover 7. Disconnect the flexible printed wiring board from the
connector (CN502) on the PRT-13 board.
1. Remove the M3 case screws, then remove the top 8. Remove the four hooks, then remove the front panel
cover. assembly.
9. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.)
M3 case screw 10. Disconnect the two flexible flat cables from the
Top cover connectors (CN204 and CN205) on the SY-282 board.
11. Remove the power switch rod.
M3 case screw
Flexible flat cable (14-pin)

Power switch rod SY-282 board
Connector
(CN204)
Connector Connector
PSW (CN502) (CN205)
3x6
M3 case screw
PRT-13 board
Flexible printed
Hook wiring board (16-pin)
Hooks BVTT 3x6
2-2-2. Front Panel Assembly Front panel assembly
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)

2. Open the front door in the direction indicated by arrow 12. Install the front panel assembly in the reverse order of
1. steps 1 to 11.
3. Press the EJECT button and take out the cartridge in
the direction indicated by arrow 2.
4. Press the PUSH portion of the paper feed tray and take
out the tray in the direction indicated by arrow 3.
5. Take out the delivery tray in the direction indicated by
arrow 4.
EJECT button
Cartridge
2 4
1
Delivery tray
PU
SH Front door
3
Paper feed tray
PUSH portion
2-2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2-2-3. Rear Panel Assembly 2-3. Replacement of Main Parts
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) 2-3-1. Replacement of VPR-63 Board
2. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.)
3. Disconnect one flexible flat cable from the connector 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
(CN207) on the SY-282 board. 2. Disconnect the four flexible flat cables from the
4. Remove the five screws, then remove the rear panel connectors (CN101, CN102, CN103, and CN105) on
assembly. the VPR-63 board and one harness from the connector
(CN104).
3. Remove the four screws, then remove the VPR-63
board.
SY-282 board Rear panel 4. Remove the four screws, then remove the VPR frame
assembly from the VPR-63 board.
Connector Harness
(CN207) Flexible flat cable (18-pin)
Flexible flat cable (24-pin) BVTT

BVTT 3x6 3x6
Flexible flat cable (30-pin) CN105
BVTT 3x6
BVTT
3x6
BVTT 3x6 Connector BVTT
VPR-63 (CN102) 3x6
board Connector
(CN104)
5. Install the rear panel assembly in the reverse order of BVTT Connector
Connector (CN103)
steps 1 to 4. 3x6
(CN101)
VPR
frame
5. Install a new VPR-63 board in the reverse order of

steps 1 to 4.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-3

2-3-2. Replacement of SY-282 Board 2-3-3. Replacement of IF-764 and IF-767
Boards
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Ssection 2-2-1.)
2. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.) IF-764 board
3. Disconnect the seven flexible flat cables from the 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
connectors (CN201 to CN207) on the SY-282 board 2. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.)
and one harness from the connector (CN208). 3. Remove the rear panel assembly.
4. Remove the four screws, then remove the SY-282 (Refer to Section 2-2-3.)
board. 4. Remove the two screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
the IF cover.
5. Disconnect the two flexible flat cables from the
connectors (CN401 and CN402) on the IF-764 board.
Harness 6. Remove the ten screws (BVTP 3 x 10), then remove
Flexible flat cable
Flexible flat cable
(30-pin) the IF-764 board.
(13-pin)
Flexible flat cable
(23-pin) Flexible flat cable Flexible flat cable (22-pin)
(25-pin) Flexible flat cable (18-pin)
BVTT 3x6
Connector (CN205)
Connector Rear panel assembly
Connector (CN203) (CN208)
BVTT 3x6 IF cover
SY-282 board Connector(CN402)
Connector
(CN206) Connector Connector IF-764 board
(CN207)
Connector (CN401)
(CN204)
Connector
(CN201) Connector
(CN202)
BVTP 3x10
BVTT 3x6
Flexible flat cable
(24-pin)
7. Install a new IF-764 board in the reverse order of steps

1 to 6.
5. Install a new SY-282 board in the reverse order of
steps 1 to 4.
2-4 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

IF-767 board 2-3-4. Replacement of DC Fans (1)
2. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.) 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
3. Remove the rear panel assembly. 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 2-2-3.) (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
4. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the connector 3. Remove the mechanical block.
(CN101) on the IF-767 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
5. Remove the two screws, then remove the IF frame. 4. Remove the coil spring from the mechanical chassis L
6. Remove the four connector screws, then remove the assembly.
IF-767 board. 5. Remove one screw (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove the
harness (for grounding).
6. Remove the seven screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
Flexible flat cable (25-pin) IF frame the mechanical chassis L assembly in the direction
Connector screws indicated by the arrow.
Connector
(CN101)
7. Remove the harnesses of the DC fans (1) from the
connectors (CN602 and CN603) on the SE-539 board.
8. Remove the four screws (PSW 4 x 20), then remove
the two DC fans (1) from the mechanical chassis L
IF-767 board assembly.
Mechanical chassis
L assembly DC fans (1)
BVTT 3x6
PSW
4x20
SE-539
board
(CN602)
PSW 4x20
SE-539board
(CN603)
7. Install a new IF-767 board in the reverse order of steps BVTT

1 to 6. 3x6
Harness BVTT
(for grounding) 3x6 BVTT 3x6
Mechanical chassis
L assembly
BVTT 3x6
Coil spring
9. Install new DC fans (1) in the reverse order of steps 1

to 8.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-5

2-3-5. Replacement of Switching Regulator 2-3-6. Replacement of PRT-13 Board
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
2. Remove the VPR-63 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-1.) 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
3. Remove the rear panel assembly. (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
(Refer to Section 2-2-3.) 3. Disconnect the six flexible flat cables from the
4. Remove the SY-282 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-2.) connectors (CN303, CN304, CN306, CN401, CN501,
5. Remove the four screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove and CN601) on the PRT-13 board.
the SY frame. 4. Disconnect the two harnesses from the connectors
6. Disconnect the harnesses from the two clampers. (CN302 and CN505) on the PRT-13 board.
7. Disconnect the three harnesses from the connectors 5. Remove the four screws, then remove the PRT-13
(CN901, CN902, and CN903) of the switching board.
regulator.
8. Remove the four screws (PS 3 x 6), then remove the
switching regulator. Flexible flat
cable (24-pin)
BVTT
3x6 Flexible flat cable (14-pin)
PRT-13 board Flexible flat Harness

(CN301) SY frame cable (18-pin)
PRT-13
board
(CN302) Clamper Connector Connector
(CN501)
(CN302)
Connector
BVTT 3x6 VPR-63 board (CN303) BV 3x6
(CN104) Switching Flexible flat
cable (28-pin) Connector
regulator (CN401)
BV 3x6
Clamper Connector
Connector (CN306)
Harness Harness (CN304) Harness
Connector
Connector (CN505)
(CN601) PRT-13
board
Connector
(CN903)
Connector
(CN902) Connector
(CN901)
PS 3x6
PS 3x6 6. Install a new PRT-13 board in the reverse order of

steps 1 to 5.
9. Install a new switching regulator in the reverse order

of steps 1 to 8.
2-6 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2-3-7. Replacement of Thermal Head 6. Remove the coil spring from the mechanical chassis L
assembly.
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) 7. Remove the three screws (PSW 3 x 6), then remove
2. Remove the front panel assembly. the heat sink.
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.) 8. Remove the two screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
3. Remove the three hooks, then remove the harness the harness (for grounding) and head pressure.
clamper. 9. Move the thermal head in the order of arrows 1 to 3
4. Disconnect the two flexible flat cables from the and remove it.
connectors (CN303 and CN304) on the PRT-13 board. 10. Remove the two screws (PSW 3 x 6), then remove the
5. Remove the three screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove thermal head from the head holder.
the cartridge guide. 11. Disconnect the two flexible flat cables from the
thermal head.
Flexible flat Mechanical
Harness clamper chassis Coil spring
cable (28-pin) BVTT Harness
L assembly
BVTT PSW 3x6 (for grounding)
3x6 3x6
Head pressure
Hook
PRT-13
Cartridge board
guide
Heat sink
Hook
1
Hook 2
Connector
(CN303)
Connector
(CN304) 1 Thermal
BVTT 3x6 head
3 Head holder
PSW
3x6
Thermal head
Flexible flat cables
12. Install a new thermal head in the reverse order of steps

1 to 11.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-7

2-3-8. Replacement of Mechanical Block 2-3-9. Replacement of SE-539 Board
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
2. Remove the front panel assembly. 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.) (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
3. Disconnect the two flexible flat cables from the 3. Remove the mechanical block.
connectors (CN306 and CN501) on the PRT-13 board (Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
and one harness from the connector (CN302). 4. Disconnect the 12 harnesses from the connectors
4. Disconnect the harness (CN301) from the connector (CN101 to CN106, CN302, and CN601 to CN605) on
on the SE-539 board. the SE-539 board and the two flexible flat cables from
5. Disconnect the harness (CN101) from the connector the connectors (CN150 and CN610).
on the AN-15 board. 5. Remove the four screws and one clamper, then remove
6. Remove the six screws, then remove the mechanical the SE-539 board.
block.
Harness
Connector
Flexible flat BVTT 3x6 (CN150)
Connector cable (14-pin)
(CN101) Harness
Flexible flat BVTT Connector
Harness cable (24-pin) (CN102)
AN-15 board 3x6 Connector
(CN105) Connector Flexible flat
PRT-13 board Connector (CN306) (CN302) cable (30-pin)
Harness
Mechanical Connector
Connector
block (CN301) Connector (CN104)
(CN603) Harness
Connector
(CN602)
SE-539
Connector board
Connector SE-539
Connector (CN501) (CN601) board
(CN302) Connector
SY-282 Connector BVTT
(CN605) (CN610)
board 3x6
Connector Clamper
(CN101) Connector
Connector Connector (CN103)
BVTT (CN604)
3x6 (CN106)
Harness
Connector
(CN203) Mechanical block
Connector
(CN206) 6. Install a new SE-539 board in the reverse order of
BVTT 3x6
steps 1 to 5.
BVTT 3x6
7. Install the mechanical block in the reverse order of

steps 1 to 6.
2-8 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2-3-10. Replacement of Tray Motor 2-3-11. Replacement of Ribbon Take-Up
Motor
2. Remove the front panel assembly. 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.) 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
3. Remove the mechanical block. (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
(Refer to Section 2-3-8.) 3. Remove the mechanical block.
4. Remove the SE-539 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-9.) (Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
5. Remove the three screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove 4. Remove the SE-539 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-9.)
the tray motor bracket assembly. 5. Remove the five screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
6. Remove the two retaining rings, then remove the TM the take-up motor bracket assembly.
gear A and TM worm wheel. 6. Remove one retaining ring, then remove the ribbon
7. Remove the two screws (PS 3 x 4), then remove the worm wheel.
tray motor assembly. 7. Remove the two screws (PS 3 x 4), then remove the
8. Remove the harness and two solders on the SU-53 ribbon take-up motor.
board. 8. Remove the harness and two solders on the SU-55
9. Remove the worm gear assembly and worm shaft cap board.
from the tray motor. 9. Remove the head worm gear assembly and worm shaft
cap from the ribbon take-up motor.
Harness
SU-53 board
Tray motor Worm shaft cap
assembly Tray motor
bracket assembly Head worm gear assembly
Two solders
Worm die
BVTT 3x6
Take-up motor
Tray motor assembly bracket assembly
BVTT BVTT
Tray motor bracket assembly 3x6 PS 3x4 3x6
Worm shaft cap Ribbon Ribbon take-up
TM gear A worm wheel motor
Retaining
ring Harness
PS 3x4 BVTT SU-55
Worm shaft cap 3x6
TM worm wheel board
Two solders
Mechanical block Mechanical

block
10. Install a new tray motor in the reverse order of steps 1

to 9.
10. Install a new ribbon take-up motor in the reverse order
of steps 1 to 9.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-9

2-3-12. Replacement of Ribbon Supply 6. Pull up the stepping motor bracket assembly, release
Motor the hook, and remove it.
7. Loosen one screw fixing the platen belt idler, move the
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) platen pulley in the direction indicated by the arrow,
2. Remove the front panel assembly. and remove the platen belt 120TN.
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.) 8. Remove the two screws (PS 3 x 6) and harness, then
3. Remove the mechanical block. remove the stepping motor.
(Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
4. Remove the SE-539 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-9.) Screw
(Fixing screw)
5. Remove the three screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
the supply gear bracket assembly. Platen
belt idler
6. Remove the two screws (PS 2.6 x 4), then remove the
ribbon supply motor.
7. Remove the harness and two solders on the SU-56 Platen
board. belt 120TN Stepping motor
Platen pulley bracket assembly
Platen motor Coil Harness

Ribbon supply motor BVTT
Supply gear
bracket assembly bracket assembly spring 3x6
SU-56 board W3
Two
BVTT BVTT solders
Mechanical block 3x6 3x6 W3
Mechanical
block PS
3x6
Harness
PS 2.6x4
BVTT
3x6
8. Install a new ribbon supply motor in the reverse order Stepping motor bracket assembly
of steps 1 to 7.
Platen belt
180TN
2-3-13. Replacement of Stepping Motor
Hook
Platen block
1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.) assembly
2. Remove the front panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
3. Remove the mechanical block.
(Refer to Section 2-3-8.) 9. Install a new stepping motor in the reverse order of
4. Remove the coil spring (on the mechanical block side), steps 1 to 8.
then remove the four screws (BVTT 3 x 6) and W3.
5. Push down the platen motor bracket assembly, loosen
the platen belt 180TN, and remove it.
2-10 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2-3-14. Replacement of Head Motor 2-3-15. Replacement of Paper Feed
Assembly
2. Remove the front panel assembly. 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
(Refer to Section 2-2-2.) 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
3. Remove the mechanical block. (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
(Refer to Section 2-3-8.) 3. Remove the mechanical block.
4. Remove the three screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove (Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
the head motor bracket assembly. 4. Remove the PRT-13 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-6.)
5. Remove the retaining ring E4, then remove the head 5. Remove the cartridge guide. (Refer to Section 2-3-7.)
joint gear block. 6. Remove the delivery cover.
6. Remove the retaining ring E3, then remove the head 7. Remove the SE-539 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-9.)
worm wheel. 8. Remove the tray motor assembly.
7. Remove the two screws (BVTT 3 x 6) and worm cap (Refer to Section 2-3-10.)
bracket, then remove the worm gear block. 9. Remove the two screws (BVTT 3 x 8), then remove
8. Remove the two screws (PS 3 x 4), then remove the the front door stopper.
head motor. 10. Remove the four screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
9. Remove the harness and two solders on the SU-52 the mechanical chassis R assembly.
board. 11. Remove the two screws (BVTT 3 x 6), then remove
the mechanical chassis F assembly.
Worm cap bracket Worm shaft cap 12. Remove one screw (BVTT 3 x 6) of mechanical
Polywasher chassis B.
BVTT Head worm 13. Remove the three hooks, then remove the delivery
3x6 gear assembly
Retaining base.
ring E5 Encoder
Worm coupling Delivery cover
Polywasher 6
Driving ring lever spacer Head motor
bracket
Coil spring assembly
Head joint gears
Retaining BVTT 3x6 Delivery base
ring E4 Head Mechanical block
Mechanical motor
block
Retaining BVTT BVTT 3x6 Hook
ring E3 3x6
Head PS 3x4 Hooks
worm wheel
Two Harness BVTT
solders 3x6
BVTT
SU-52 board
3x6
BVTT
3x8 Mechanical
Front door chassis R
10. Install a new head motor in the reverse order of steps 1 stopper BVTT 3x6 assembly
to 9.
Mechanical chassis F assembly
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 2-11

14. Remove one pawl and two hooks, then remove the 2-3-16. Replacement of Paper Feed Motor
paper feed tray guide.
15. Remove the four screws (BVTT 3 x 6) and the three 1. Remove the top cover. (Refer to Section 2-2-1.)
harness of the paper feed assembly. 2. Remove the front panel assembly.
16. Shift the paper feed assembly in the direction indicated (Refer to Section 2-2-2.)
by arrow 1 and remove the three hooks. 3. Remove the mechanical block.
n (Refer to Section 2-3-8.)
Be sure not to deform or damage the sensor, gear, or 4. Remove the PRT-13 board. (Refer to Section 2-3-6.)
lever. 5. Remove the cartridge guide. (Refer to Section 2-3-7.)
17. Remove the paper feed assembly while inclining it in 6. Remove the paper feed assembly.
the direction indicated by arrow 2. (Refer to Section 2-3-16.)
7. Remove the two screws, then remove the paper feed
Harness
motor.
Paper feed assembly Lever 8. Remove the two solders on the SU-54 board.
BVTT Hooks
3x6 BVTT 3x6
Mechanical Harnesses
Paper feed assembly Belt 50TN
block 2
1
BVTT 3x6
Sensor
Sensor
Mechanical
chassis B
Paper feed PS2.6x4
tray guide
BVTT
3x6
Hook
Hooks
Harness
Paper feed motor

Two solders
18. Install a new paper feed assembly in the reverse order
of steps 1 to 17. SU-54 board
9. Install a new paper feed motor in the reverse order of

steps 1 to 8.
2-12 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Section 3
Electrical Alignment and Mechanical Alignment
3-1. Electrical Adjustment
3-1-1. Output of Test Pattern (Internal Signal) in Service Mode
This mode is used when replacing the PRT-13 board, thermal head, power, and parts.
1. Density adjustment
The density must be adjusted during thermal head replacement.
(1) For the density adjustment, print test pattern STEP (V) in advance by the method below before
replacing the head and extract a reference sample.
(2) After replacing the head, print SETP (V) again and adjust the head voltage so that the density is
almost the same as that of the reference sample.
(3) After head replacement and voltage adjustment, reset the number of estimated head print sheets.
2. Extraction of sample for density adjustment

(1) Set an ink ribbon and paper.
(2) Set the power switch to ON while pressing the ← and → keys simultaneously. The printer then
enters the service mode.
(3) Message “HIT ANY KEY” is displayed. Press any key.
(4) A menu is displayed.
(5) Move the cursor to “PRINT TEST:”.
(6) Press the EXEC key. A test pattern (STEP (V)) is then displayed on the monitor so as to start
printing.
At that time, the printer controls the thermal head temperature until it reaches a proper temperature.
. When the head temperature is low: The printer performs preheating and starts printing after the
head temperature reaches a proper temperature.
. When the head temperature is high: The printer performs cooling using a fan and starts printing
after the head temperature reaches a proper temperature.
n
If the head temperature is not proper, it may slightly take time to enter the print operation state after
you press the EXEC key.
3. Head voltage adjustment

(4) Move the cursor to “HEAD V:”.
(5) Press the ← and → keys to increase or decrease the head voltage parameter. Next, press the
EXEC key to define the setting.
m
. The head voltage does not change if you do not press the EXEC key.
. By decreasing the parameter, the head voltage decreases and the density also decreases. By
increasing the parameter, the head voltage increases and the density also increases. This parameter
does not directly represent the head applied voltage value.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-1

4. Resetting the number of estimated head print sheets
(4) Move the cursor to “HEAD PRN:”.
(5) Press the CLEAR key while pressing the EXEC key. The number of estimated print sheets is then
reset.
5. Printing other patterns

(4) Move the cursor to “PATTERN” when printing other patterns.
(5) Press the ← and → keys to display the required test pattern name.
(6) Press the EXEC key. A test pattern is then displayed on the monitor.
(7) Press the PRINT key to start printing.
n
At that time, the printer does not control the thermal head temperature. The printer immediately
enters the print operation when you press the PRINT key.
m
. In the state where an error (e.g., no paper or no ribbon) exists, the printer operates with the error
displayed. In this case, press the MENU key, then press the ← and → keys to display a service
menu. Next, perform each operation described above.
. This test pattern cannot be output in the state where MULTI PIX is set to “2”. When MULTI PIX is
other than “1”, a white frame may be put into the print result of a test pattern. In this case, set MULTI
PIX to “1”, then print.
3-2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

There are several types of test patterns. Four standard patterns are as shown below.
1 STEP (H) 2 STEP (V)
3 RAMP (H) 4 RAMP (V)
3-1-2. Density Adjustment During Thermal Head Replacement
1. Output test pattern STEP (V) referring to “3-1-1. Output of Test Pattern (Internal Signal)”.
2. Press the PRINT key and print test pattern STEP (V) before replacing the thermal head. (The print
result is used as the reference of density.)
3. Replace the thermal head.
4. After thermal head replacement, print test pattern STEP (V) again and adjust the density.
5. Reset the number of head print sheets.
1. To increase (decrease) the print density

(1) Press the ↑ and ↓ keys and move the cursor to “HEAD V:**SET [EXEC]” in a service menu.
(2) Press the ← and → keys and increase the value of numbers displayed in hexadecimal.
Increase the value: The head supply voltage increases.
Decrease the value: The head supply voltage decreases.
(3) Press the EXEC key to define the voltage.
(4) Press the PRINT key and print test pattern STEP (V).
Adjust HEAD V repeatedly until the print result becomes almost the same in density as the reference
printed before head replacement.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-3

2. To reset the number of head print sheets
(1) Press the ↑ and ↓ keys and move the cursor to “HEAD PRN.:*****” in a service menu.
(2) Press the CLEAR and EXEC keys simultaneously.
(3) “Pipipi pipipi” sounds and the number of estimated HEAD PRN print sheets is set to “00000”.
n
A memory image may be cleared depending on the timing in which you press the CLEAR and EXEC keys.
3-1-3. Electrical Adjustment (Analog Video Block)
Preparation
1. Composite video signal
75% FULL FIELD color bars (WHITE REF 100IRE)
2. S video signal
75% FULL FIELD color bars
3. RGB signal
WINDOW (WHITE 100IRE)
Entering the adjustment mode

. Set the power switch to ON while pressing the ← and → keys simultaneously and start the printer in
the service mode.
. Display “SERVICEMENU3”.
SERVICE MENU3
/SVC2/SVC3/SVC4
IRE : 100/11/12/13
AGC : OFF/ON
VA ADJUST : PRESS[EXEC]
INPUT SEL : V/SV/RGB
PICTURE : 33
G-DRIVE : 28
B-DRIVE : 28
SUB-BRIGHT : 14
VBS Y : A1
Q01A 1 S
* The italic character varies depending on the adjustment value.
Entering the “VA ADJUST” mode

Move the cursor to the “VA ADJUST” position and press the EXEC key. The printer then enters the
“VA ADJUST” mode. In this state, no signal is displayed on the monitor. Press the EXEC key again to
cancel the mode.
Cautions during adjustment

. Before adjustment, return all user adjustment items (including “COLOR ADJUST”) to the center position.
. Adjustment is performed in the SOURCE output mode unless otherwise specified.
3-4 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

1. INT 4Fsc adjustment (NTSC)
Conditions for adjustment Spec. Adjustment
1. SOURCE/MEMORY: MEMORY TP405 (B-6): 14 M 1CT401(B-6): 14.3

2. NTSC/PAL: NTSC
1,431,818 ± 80 Hz
2. INT 4Fsc adjustment (PAL)
1. SOURCE/MEMORY: MEMORY TP404(A-6): 17M 1CT403 (A-5): 17.7

2. NTCS/PAL: PAL
1,773,447.5 ± 80.0 Hz
3. INT 4Fsc adjustment (PAL)
1. SOURCE/MEMORY: MEMORY TP406 (B-5): VCO DC 1CT402 (B-5): 14.1

2. NTCS/PAL: PAL
2.0 ± 0.2 Vdc
4. Picture adjustment
1. VA ADJUST MODE Monitor [SERVICE MENU3]

2. INPUT SELECT: RGB [PICTURE:]
3. AGC: OFF
4. NTSC/PAL: NTSC
Adjust so that the red (or yellow, magenta, or

white) in the diagonally striped portion is the
maximum.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-5

5. G-drive adjustment

2. INPUT SELECT: RGB [G-DRIVE:]
3. AGC: OFF
4. NTSC/PAL: NTSC
Adjust so that the yellow (or white) in the

diagonally striped portion is the maximum.
6. B-drive adjustment

2. INPUT SELECT: RGB [B-DRIVE:]
3. AGC: OFF
4. NTSC/PAL: NTSC
Adjust so that the white in the diagonally

striped portion is the maximum.
7. AGC REF adjustment

2. INPUT SELECT: RGB [SUB-BRIGHT:]
3. AGC: ON
4. NTSC/PAL: NTSC

3-6 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

8. VBS Y adjustment

2. INPUT SELECT: VIDEO [VBS Y:]
SIGNAL: COLOR BAR
3. AGC: OFF
4. NTSC/PAL: NTSC

9. H position adjustment
1. INPUT SELECT: VIDEO TP402 (C-5): SWD HD 1RV201 (D-6): H POSI

2. INPUT SIGNAL: COLOR BAR TP410 (A-5): SYNC MONI
SWD HD
SYNC MONI
A = 100 ± 100 nS
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-7

3-2. Mechanical Adjustment
3-2-1. Mechanical Adjustment Mode
In this mode, the adjustment of the boards (PRT-13, SE-539 through SE-542, SE-544 through SE-548,
SE-550 through SE-557, and SU-52 through SU-56 boards) installed in a mechanical deck and the
assembly of mechanical parts are confirmed. The confirmation is carried out when replacing the boards
installed in a mechanical deck or the mechanical deck parts.
n
Various information items of a mechanical deck are stored in IC407 on the PRT-13 board. Be sure to
perform all mechanical adjustment after IC407 and PRT-13 board are replaced.
3-2-2. Entering the Mechanical Adjustment Mode
1. Turn on the power while pressing the DISPLAY and EXEC keys simultaneously. (Continue
pressing them until MECHA JIG MODE appears on the LCD display.)
2. The “MECHA_SETUP” menu in the mechanical adjustment mode appears on the screen (or LCD
display).
[MECHA SETUP menu]
[For OK] [For NG]
3. Press the ↑ and ↓ keys, move the cursor to the item to be adjusted or checked, and then press the
EXEC key.
3-8 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4. Adjustment and check are automatically performed by the mechanical deck. After the adjustment
and check are completed, the result appears on the screen (or LCD display).
5. When “OK” is displayed, adjustment and check are completed normally. When abnormality is
checked, an error code is displayed. (Take measures referring to the NG_CODE table (at the end of
this manual)).
6. To exit the mechanical adjustment mode, turn on the power again.
3-2-3. Normal Operation Check and Automatic Adjustment
1. SENSORS_CHECK
Contents
. Is communication between boards possible?
. Does the sensor of the item to be checked operate normally? (Refer to NG_CODE2.)
. Are harnesses and mechanical parts connected properly?
Procedure
(1) Pull out the ribbon cartridge and paper tray. (Also, pull out the discharge unit.)
(2) Move the cursor to the desired item and press the EXEC key.
Display
. OK: OK
. NG: NO ANSWER (If NO ANSWER is displayed, SCI communication with the SY-282 board is
impossible. Therefore, the subsequent adjustment and check cannot be carried out.)
NG command (E2) and NG data (**)(One-byte data is displayed using a hexadecimal code. The
hexadecimal code is converted into a binary code, and the bit whose “1” is set indicates the
location where NG occurs. Refer to NG_CODE2.)
2. THERMAL & EEPROM_CHECK

Contents
. Does IC407 on the PRT-13 board operate normally? (The number of estimated sheets or the sensor
information is stored in IC407.)
. Do the thermistor of a thermal head, the thermistor (TH1) on the SE-539 board, and the thermistor
(THP1) on the SE-555 board operate normally?
Procedure
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item, press the ← and → keys to select the item, and then press the
EXEC key.
When the display number is 00: Check the thermistor and EEPROM operation. (The contents remain
unchanged.)
When the display number is 01: Check the thermistor and clear the contents of EEPROM (*).
* Contents to be cleared: Number of estimated sheets, number of estimated head sheets,
ShiftH, ShiftV, and error history
n
Be sure to adjust it by display number 01 when replacing the PRT-13 board or IC407 newly.
Display
. OK: 00: OK
01: OK OK
. NG: NG command (E3) and NG data (**)(One-byte data is displayed using a hexadecimal code. The
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-9

[OK display in case of 00] [OK display in case of 01]
3. HEAD_HOME_CHECK
Contents
. Does the head position sensor operate normally?
. Does the head motor operate?
Procedure
(1) Pull out the ribbon cartridge and paper tray.
Display
. OK: OK
value of the hexadecimal code is an NG item. Refer to NG_CODE1.)
4. TRAY_HOME_CHECK
Contents
. Does the tray position sensor operate normally?
. Does the tray motor operate?
Procedure
Display
. OK: OK
3-10 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5. PLATEN_HOME_CHECK
Contents
. Does the platen position sensor operate normally?
. Does the platen motor operate?
Procedure
Display
. OK: OK
6. FG_SENSOR_CHECK
Contents
. Do the paper feed FG sensor and ribbon FG (take-up and supply) sensors operate normally?
. Do the paper feed motor and ribbon motor operate?
Procedure
Display
. OK: OK
7. RBN_CD_ADJUSTMENT
Contents
. Automatic light-emitting level and threshold level adjustments of RBN_CD sensor
. Does the ribbon motor operate?
Procedure
(1) Insert a ribbon cartridge.
Display
. OK: OK
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-11

8. PRINT_ADJUSTMENT
Contents
. Automatic light-emitting level and threshold level adjustments of PLT_JAM sensor
. Does irregular printing occur by the thermal head or gear?
. Is an error found in the path system of paper?
Procedure
(1) Insert a ribbon cartridge and paper tray.
Display
. OK: OK
. NG: NG command and NG data (H ‘**) (One-byte data is displayed using a hexadecimal code. The
9. SENSORS_DATA
Contents
. The adjustment values (light-emitting level value, high-level value, low-level value, and threshold level
value) of automatically adjusted two sensors are displayed. (RBN_CD sensor and PLT_JAM sensor)
. Trouble historical information of mechanical deck (The error information that occurred during
mechanical operation is read. Up to the last eight information items are stored. The contents of
information correspond to the NG_CODE1 data. Press the CLEAR key to clear data. When clearing
is completed, OK is displayed.)
Procedure
Move the cursor to the desired item, press the ← and → keys to select the item, and then press the
EXEC key.
When display number is 00: Trouble historical information
For 01: RBN_CD sensor
For 02: PLT_JAM sensor
[Display example of trouble historical information] [Display after trouble historical information is cleared]
[Display example of sensor data]
3-12 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Viewing the display of sensor adjustment value
(Example) 84 f5 0f 80
One-byte data is displayed using a hexadecimal code. In each sensor, data is arranged in the
order of “light-emitting level value”, “high-level value”, “low-level value”, and “threshold
level value” from the beginning.
(For the data described above, the LED voltage value is 84, the high-level value of PHTR is
f5, the low-level value of PHTR is 0f, and the threshold level value is 80.)
Converting the displayed data into the voltage value of a sensor

The displayed data indicates the value obtained when the voltage level (0 to 5.0 V) of each sensor is
divided by 256. Therefore, the voltage value indicated using a hexadecimal code is obtained from the
calculation below.
(Example) When the hexadecimal code is H ‘b3:
H ‘b3 = D’ 179 (← The hexadecimal display is converted into a decimal display.)
5.0 (v) x 179/256 = 3.4 (v) (← Voltage value of sensor indicated by H ‘b3)
3-3. Upgrading the Firmware
3-3-1. Firmware
The PRT-13 board is flash memory in which IC6 stores starting ROM and in which IC12 stores firmware.
Introduction of the flash memory into program storage memory enables the firmware to be upgraded
through an RS-232C interface. The upgraded data is received by the SY-282 board. After that, it is sent
to the PRT-13 board via serial communication. After the PRT-13 board receives all data, it carries out a
checksum. If no error is detected in data, the rewrite operation of the flash memory is started.
The address map of firmware is shown below.
H’00000
ROM (IC6)
H’20000
FLASH
H’40000
In a program, IC6 first operates. IC6 carries out the checksum of IC12. If the contents of a program are
normal, IC6 moves to IC12 and enters the normal operation. If the contents of IC12 are abnormal, IC6
does not move and displays the message below on LCD so as to notify that upgrading is required.
n
If the message below appears on the LCD display, upgrade the firmware first.
UPGRADE FIRMWARE
REQUEST PRT
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-13

3-3-2. Upgrading
In the following cases, upgrade the firmware.

1. When the improvement in a function (the upgrading of firmware) is required
2. When message “UPGRADE FIRMWARE REQUEST” appears on the LCD display
3. When the PRT-13 board or IC12 (flash memory) on the PRT-13 board is replaced
The upgrade information can be downloaded from the home page GSP (Global Support http://
WWW.gsp.cpg.sony.co.jp/).
For URL from which the latest firmware is downloaded, refer to the technical memorandum.
3-3-3. Upgrading Method
Upgrade the firmware in the procedure below.

1. Download the file below from a www server (Software Warehouse) to a personal computer (PC).
Upgrading utility: UP-50_PRT_UPGRADE.exe
Latest firmware: prtXXX.vup
2. Connect the PC and printer using an interface cable.
3. Pull out the ribbon cartridge and paper tray.
4. Turn on the power of the printer and PC.
5. Adjust the communication rate according to the PC. (Default: 9600 bps)
n
Use a cross cable as the RS cable when transferring data in 9600 bps.
A reverse cable or cross cable can be used as the RS cable when transferring data in 4800 bps.
6. Open “UP-50_PRT_UPGRADE.exe”.
7. Adjust the transfer rate of printer data according to PC. (9600 bps/4800 bps)
8. Select the latest firmware file to be transferred using “Search” and start the transfer using “Send”.
9. Message “NOW UPGRADING” appears on the LCD display when upgrading is started.
10. The printer restarts after about three minutes and thirty seconds. Upgrading is completed when the
printer is put into the Ready state.
n
In the utility, message “Normal End/Check SUM = XXXX” is displayed. For 4800 bps, it takes
about five minutes to restart the printer.
When upgrading fails:

1. Turn off the power of a printer once and then restart it.
2. Message “VERUP REQUEST PRT” appears on the LCD display of the printer.
3. Upgrade the firmware again.
When the printer does not operate due to the failure in upgrading:
1. Turn on the power while shorting-circuit connector CN404 (2-pin connector) on the PRT-13 board
with tweezers.
2. Message “VERUP REQUEST PRT” appears on the LCD display of a printer. Stop the short-circuit
operation and upgrade the firmware again.
3-14 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

3-4. Lamination Head Voltage Adjustment
The lamination density can be adjusted when using UPC-540 (lamination media).
The head voltage during lamination can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing a
parameter.
The head voltage is adjusted during factory setting. However, readjust the head voltage when the
lamination is defective or when the surface is burned.
n
After increasing or decreasing a parameter, make a print and check the lamination density visually.
3-4-1. Adjusting the Lamination Head Voltage
1. Set the power switch to ON while pressing the ← and → keys simultaneously. The printer then
2. Press the ↑ and ↓ keys to move the cursor to “LAMIV” of “SERVICE MENU2”.
3. Press the ← and → keys to increase or decrease a parameter. (The voltage increases or decreases
proportionally.)
4. Press the EXEC key to define the head voltage.
n
The head voltage does not change when the EXEC key is not pressed.
5. Check the printing.
3-5. Ribbon Tension Adjustment
This function is used to improve a defective print due to the creases or spots on a ribbon by increasing or
decreasing a parameter. The ribbon tension can be set in the media and PRINT modes. The ribbon drive
voltages (on the take-up and supply sides) are increased or decreased and the ribbon tension is adjusted by
increasing or decreasing the set parameter.
n
After increasing or decreasing the parameter, be sure to check the printing.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 3-15

3-5-1. Ribbon Tension Adjustment Menu
[Service menu 4] [Service menu 5]
Description of display terms

SPLY: Ribbon supply
TKUP: Ribbon take-up
510: UPC510 (Standard media)
540: UPC540 (Lamination media)
H1: Speed print (1, 4, or 16 division mode)
H2: Speed print (2 or 8 division mode)
L1: Normal print (1, 4, or 16 division mode)
L2: Normal print (2 or 8 division mode)
(Example) SPLY510 H1: Indicates the “speed print (1, 4, or 16 division mode) adjustment of “UPC510
media” in a “ribbon supply”.
3-5-2. Adjusting the Ribbon Tension
1. Set the power switch to ON while pressing the ← and → keys simultaneously. The printer then
2. Press the ↑ and ↓ keys to move the cursor to the item to be adjusted in “SERVICE MENU4” (or
5).
3. Press the ← and → keys to increase or decrease a parameter. (The voltage increases or decreases
proportionally.) Press the EXEC key to define the voltage.
n
The parameter is not reflected when the EXEC key is not pressed.
4. Check the printing.
Standard of adjustment
Creases appear: Decrease the SPLY value and increase the TKUP value.
Spots appear: Increase the SPLY value.
Color shading occurs: Decrease the TKUP value.
Ribbon is caught: Increase the TKUP value.
3-16 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Section 4
Circuit Operation Description
4-1. Digital Video Signal Processing Block
4-1-1. Outline
The main functions of the digital signal processing block on the VPR-63 board are as follows:
1. Converts a video input signal from analog to digital and stores it in memory (DRAM). (Capture)
2. Color-adjusts the image data stored in memory using a color adjustment circuit, and then converts the
data from digital to analog and outputs it to the analog signal processing block on the VPR-63 board
as a monitor output signal. (Monitor output)
3. Color-adjusts the image data stored in memory using a color adjustment circuit and then outputs it to
the head control block through a masking block as print data. (Print data output)
4. Converts a video input signal from analog to digital, converts the signal from digital to analog as it is,
and outputs it to the analog signal processing block as a monitor output signal. (Source output)
The digital signal processing block on the VPR-63 board consists of the following blocks.
. CPU block
. Memory (DRAM) block
. Memory control (ASIC) block
. Sampling clock generation block
. Color adjustment block
. Masking block
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-1

4-1-2. Flow of Image Signal in Each Operating Mode
The operating mode on the flow of an image signal in a digital signal processing block can be classified
into the following four modes.
. Source mode
. Memory mode
. Capture mode
. Print data transfer mode
Source mode
In this mode, a video input signal is directly output to the monitor via a digital signal processing block.
The flow of an image signal is as described below.
The RGB analog signal input from an analog signal processing block is converted from analog to digital
as an eight-bit digital signal, respectively. This signal is passed through a DRAM control circuit
(IC1001) and adjusted in color using a color adjustment circuit (IC701). After that, the image size is
adjusted by the blanking produced using a CPU and DRAM control circuit. The resultant signal is
converted from digital to analog again as an analog signal and output to the analog signal processing
block.
4-2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Memory mode
In this mode, the image data fetched into DRAM is output to the monitor.
The digital image data fetched into DRAM is read using a DRAM control circuit (CXD9111R: IC1001)
and converted from 32 bits to 8 bits. After that, the image data is adjusted in color using a color
adjustment circuit (IC701), and the image size is adjusted by the blanking produced using a DRAM
control circuit. The resultant data is converted from digital to analog and output to the analog signal
processing block.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-3

Capture mode
In this mode, a video input signal is converted from analog to digital and fetched into DRAM.
The video signal input from an analog signal processing block is converted from analog to digital as an
eight-bit digital signal. The converted video signal is converted from 8 bits to 32 bits and decimated (e.g.,
8.16 division) in a DRAM control circuit (CXD9111R: IC1001), and expanded in DRAM.
4-4 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Print data transfer mode
In this mode, the image data that exists in DRAM is output to the PRT-13 board as print data during
printing.
The data request signal from the PRT-13 board is input to CPU (IC501).
The CPU controls a DRAM control circuit (CXD9111R: IC1001), and the DRAM control circuit converts
the image data in DRAM into print data and outputs it. After that, the data is color-adjusted, color-
rotated, and converted from RGB to YMC. Next, the data is masking-converted using two masking
ROMs and output to the PRT-13 board as print data.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-5

4-1-3. Basic Operation Timing and CPU Block
The operation of the digital signal processing block on the VPR-63 board is controlled and managed
according to the command from the SY board by CPU.
CPU operates with the VD signal (SWD_VD) switched into EXT or INT as reference and performs each
setting and control for a DRAM control circuit (CXD911R).
The main functions of a CPU block for digital signal processing are as follows:
. Reception and execution of command from SY board
. VF judgment (synchronous management) of video input signal
. Output of blanking signal
. Control of DRAM control circuit
. Write of color adjustment data
. Write of caption data
. Strobe-compatible
CPU memory map

The memory map of CPU is shown below.
00000
Program ROM
20000
C0000
Color adjustment circuit (Monitor)
C1000
Color adjustment circuit (Print)
C2000
DRAM controller register
C3000
FF710
CPU internal SRAM
FFF10
FFF1C
CPU internal register

FFFFF
4-6 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Flowchart of CPU
START
Initialize
MAIN: SWD_VD
VF judgment and
IRQ0
setting of counter for CPU_VD creation
SWD_HD
VF judgment and
IRQ1
VBLANK generation
PRNT_DREQ
Setting of print data output

IRQ2
IMCAP
Execution of highest-speed image fetch function

IRQ4
SCI
Command storage and

RXI
command flag setting
Each DMA flag DRAM controller setting
VBLANK
Color adjustment VBLANK Write of color adjustment data
flag
VBLANK
Caption flag VBLANK Write of caption data
Command flag Command execution
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-7

Time-sharing timing
(1) VBLNK DLYD_HD
(2) (3)
A B C
HBLNK
(1) VBLNK period

. DRAM access
. VF judgment
. Write of color adjustment data
(2) HBLNK period

. DRAM access
(3) Effective screen period

. DRAM access
. Input and output of capture or monitor output image data
(A) DRAM refresh
(B) DRAM access of capture or monitor output image data
(C) Output of print data, and write or read of caption data
Command communication with SY board

The command communication with the SY board is performed by the bi-directional asynchronous serial
communication in which the serial communication port of CPU is used.
Asynchronous serial communication
. Start bit: 1
. Data bit: 8
. Stop bit: 1
. Parity bit: None
. Baud rate: 19200 bps
4-8 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Synchronous control
The external sync signals (EXT_VD and AFC_HD) and internal sync signals (OVD and OHD (IC401
CXD1217QN)) produced in an analog signal processing block are switched using an SRC/nMEM signal
from CPU (IC501) and sent to the CPU and DRAM control circuit as a V sync signal (SWD_VD) and H
sync signal (SWD_HD). The AFC_HD signal is AFC-processed in the analog signal processing block. If
the AFC processing should be interrupted, the operation of a digital signal processing block is not
guaranteed. The CPU to which the SWD_HD and SWD_VD sync signals were input compares each
phase for VF judgment (frame judgment). This VF judgment performs processing so that the context is
not lost even if a jitter slightly exists in the sync signals. Therefore, odd and even fields are not misplaced
for capturing. The SWD_VD sync signal is also AFC-processed by the software in CPU. Even if noise is
mixed in the SWD_VD sync signal, therefore, the noise component is canceled. A virtual VD signal is
generated by CPU even if the SWD-VD signal is interrupted and even if the period is changed
(CPU_VD). The CPU_VD signal is input to the DRAM control circuit.
Output of blanking signal

The V blanking signal that determines the position of the effective screen in the vertical direction counts
the falling of an SWD_HD signal after an SWD_VD signal is input to CPU, and it is output as a
CPUVBLNKV signal. For the H blanking signal that determines the position of the effective screen in
the horizontal direction, a BLNK signal is output as the blanking signal for input image data capture and
memory image data monitor output operations by the setting value set to the control register of a DRAM
control circuit and the input of a CPUVBLNKV signal.
Control of DRAM control circuit

. Capture operation
. Monitor output operation
. Print data output
. DRAM refresh operation
. Random access operation
To perform the operations described above, each mode is set to the register of a DRAM control circuit.
The DRAM control circuit triggers VD and HD signals for operation.
Each setting is not restricted by video timing. The setting value is latched using a VD signal and
validated after the VD signal.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-9

Write of color adjustment data
The data for a conversion table is written in CXD8869Q (color adjustment circuit) during V blanking.
Write of caption data

Caption data is set to a DRAM control circuit so as to output an access trigger (RATRG). The DRAM
control circuit expands the data on DRAM.
Strobe-compatible of IVP (e.g., certification photo)

A trigger signal for stroboscopic emission is output from a printer.
For the capture operation using an input signal from the REMOTE1 and 2 terminals and main unit’s key,
a trigger signal for stroboscopic emission is output from CPU during V period just before capture.
4-1-4. Memory (DRAM) Block
The memory block of a four-frame machine consists of 64M-bit SDRAM x 1.

In the memory block of an eight-frame machine, one 64M-bit DRAM is added in addition to the
configuration of a four-frame machine.
64M-bit DRAM x 2
The space in which two 64M-bit SDRAMs can be mounted is secured on the board. The number of
mounted SDRAMs varies depending on a four- or eight-frame machine.
CPU obtains the information on the number of mounted DRAMs by whether square-type chip conductors
(0 Z resistors) R557 and R558 are mounted or not.
Model (Destination) 4F (R557) 8F (R558) Number of 64M-bit DRAMs
UP-50 (J/UC), 51MD (UC), 51MDP (CE) NM R558 2

UP-51MDU (UC) R557 NM 1
OPE-3 (J/UC) NM R558 2
Model (Destination) DRAM reference
UP-50 (J/UC), 51MD (UC), 51MDP (CE) IC801,802

UP-51MDU (UC) IC801
OPE-3 (J/UC) IC801,802
The memory space is constituted by 600 (RAS) x 256 (CAS) x 32 bits for each color of one frame image
memory. However, the memory space is apparently considered as 600 (RAS) x 1024 (CAS) x 8 bits
during use by storing eight-bit image data proportionally to four-dot pixels (four-dot pixels in one
address) in the direction of depth. The conversion of eight bits to 32 bits and vice versa is performed
using a DRAM control circuit.
4-10 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Memory Configuration (Eight-Frame)
Memory Configuration (Four-Frame)
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-11

4-1-5. Memory Control Block
A four-dot pixel is stored in one address for high-speed processing using SDRAM of 32 bits in the
direction of depth so as to double the apparent SDRAM access speed. This processing is performed using
a standard cell circuit. The circuit is controlled by CPU.
Conversion of 8 bits to 32 bits and vice versa in case of input image data capture (FULL)
The eight-bit image data input to this circuit is stored in each line buffer in the order below.
The main operation and setting of a DRAM control circuit are as follows:
. Various capture operations
FULL image
SPLIT 2 image
SPLIT 4 image
SPLIT 8 image (Decimated in the horizontal direction.)
SPLIT 16 image (Decimated in the horizontal direction.)
Capture shift size
Write DRAM address
By setting the items above, the DRAM control circuit automatically performs the capture operation in
synchronization with VD and HD signals.
. Print data output operation
Number of output data items
Read DRAM address
The print data output operation is performed by setting the items above and by triggering from CPU.
4-12 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

. Various monitor output operations
FULL image
SPLIT 2 image (Decimated in the horizontal and vertical directions.)
4IN1 image (Equal to a SPLIT 2 image as IC operation.)
Monitor output shift size
Read DRAM address
By setting the items above, the DRAM control circuit automatically performs the monitor output
operation in synchronization with VD and HD signals.
. Random access operation
Write DRAM address
Write data
The random access operation is performed by setting the items above and by triggering from CPU during
V blanking period.
. DRAM refresh operation
Number of refresh access addresses
By setting the item above, the DRAM control circuit automatically performs the DRAM refresh
operation. (RAS only refresh)
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-13

4-1-6. Color Adjustment Block
On the video side, the color of image data is adjusted using an SRAM conversion table in IC701
(CXD8869Q). On the print side, it is adjusted using a conversion table in IC901 (CXD8869Q). The table
data is provided in the program ROM of CPU. On the video side, the table data is rewritten during V
blanking period. On the print side, it is rewritten immediately before printing.
On the print side, the color rotation and RGB-YMC conversion of print data are also performed as well as
color adjustment. The flow of data shown below is obtained according to the print color. The
information on the print color is acquired from the PRT-13 board as a COLOR0/1 signal.
4-14 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-1-7. Sampling Clock Generation Block
This block generates a sampling clock, locks the phase to the “high” level of external and internal sync
signals, and distributes the clock to the DRAM control circuit or color adjustment circuit.
The clock frequency is 17.897725 MHz for NTSC and 17.734475 MHz for PAL.
The operation timing is shown below.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-15

4-1-8. Masking Block
The masking block corrects the difference between the ideal reproduction color and the three primary
colors (Y, M, and C) of printed materials using a two-ROM data conversion system of main masking
ROM and sub-masking ROM.
The MAIN, SUB1, and SUB2 signals output from a color adjustment circuit (on the print side) is input to
the main and sub-masking ROMs together with print color information (COLOR0 and COLOR1 signals).
The data that was masking-corrected using a two-ROM conversion table is latched by IC905 and IC909
and output to the PRT-13 board as eight-bit print data.
Bus switcher
The bus switcher is a circuit (CXD8868Q IC703) that switches an image bus. This circuit has three 24-bit
ports (IOA, IOB, and IOC). As described below, it controls a bus by DIR0 and DIR1 pins.
DIR0 DIR1 Direction of bus
1 1 IOA → IOC
1 0 IOB → IOC
1 X IOC → IOA
The bus switcher also has a function that sets an output bus to “ALL LOW” by setting the FIX pin to
“High”. This function assigns the background color when the effective screen is reduced as shown below
using FIX, DIR0, and DIR1 pins.
4-1-9. A/D and D/A Conversion Blocks
The A/D conversion block consists of three A/D converters (CXD1176Q IC350 to IC352). The analog
RGB signal input from an analog signal processing block is clamped using a clamp pulse (nCLAMP
signal) and adjusted in gain using a CLP_REF signal that is input to the VREF pin of an A/D converter.
In the D/A conversion block, an eight-bit digital RGB signal is converted into an analog video signal
using an encoder (BH7243KV IC407) incorporating a three-channel D/A converter.
4-16 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-2. Analog Video Signal Processing Block
4-2-1. Outline
The analog video signal processing block mainly consists of the following two blocks.
1. Interface block (IF-764 board)
The interface block mounts a relay for THROUGH/EE selection.
All video signals are input and output from and to the external equipment via this block.
2. Analog video signal processing block (Part of VPR-63 board)
A part of the VPR-63 board consists of an analog video signal processing block.
Moreover, this block can be mainly classified into a video decoder block (that fetches the input video
signal into memory) and video encoder block (that monitors the digital video signal from memory).
I2CBUS is almost used for the setting and adjustment of an analog video block. The analog video
block is controlled by the SY-282 board.
The main functions of the analog video signal processing block are as follows:
. Selection of input signals (composite video, S video, and RGB signals)
. Conversion of composite video and S video signals into RGB signal (Decoding of video signal)
. AGC (Automatic Gain Control) for input signal
. User adjustments (HUE, COLOR, GAIN, OFFSET, MONITOR-RGB, etc.)
. OSD (On Screen Display) function
. Selection of monitor output signal (SOURCE/MEMORY)
. Sync signal processing (NTSC/PAL detection, signal detection, sync separation, and AFC)
. Conversion of RGB digital signal into composite video and S video signals (Encoding of video signal)
4-2-2. Interface Block (IF-764 Board)
A monitor output signal is switched into THROUGH or EE using this block. By using a mechanical
relay, the monitor output of an input signal can be performed even if the power of this unit is off.
R115
0
S101
2
1
3 R101
150 RL101
J101 5 J201
FL101 4
8
10
CL101 EMI 6 R102

8 150 8
7
R_IN 7
IN OUT 8 FL201 7
R_OUT
GND 7
5
EMI CL201
9
3
6 CL102 IN OUT 6
6
G_IN 5 11 GND D115 5

G_OUT
10 RD9.1M-T1B
12
12
1
4 D101 4
B_IN 3
RD9.1M-T1B
3
B_OUT
CL202
2 2
SYNC_IN D102 D116 SYNC_OUT
1 RD9.1M-T1B RD9.1M-T1B 1
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-17

4-2-3. Analog Video Signal Processing Block (Part of VPR-63 Board)
1. Input signal processing block (Decoder block)

(1) SYNC ON GREEN discriminator circuit
This board mounts a discriminator circuit that separates a sync signal from a green channel when no
sync signal is input at the time of an RGB signal input.
IC102 discriminates the existence of a sync input signal and controls a video switch (IC103) that
switches green input and sync input signals.
C126
R112 R124 R130 22uF
10k 10k 100k 6.3V
C121
Q102 0.1uF
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 IC103
IC102 (1/3) 1 2
D101 MC74HC4538AFEL 6 NJM2233BM(TE2)
1SS123-T1 C CR 6
Q104 Q 1 +V 7
1
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 5 IN1 OUT

C105 3
22uF 4 7 IN2
R116 R119 Q 2 R135
6.3V
2
2.2k 2.2k RD CTL 1k

GND
3
3
C122 8 CL108
R127 2.7k 0.001uF C129
R115 C106 R122 0.1uF
22k 330pF 47k
IC102 (2/3) R136
MC74HC4538AFEL 15 14 1k
C CR 10
Q
11
12 9
Q
RD
13
C124
22uF
6.3V
Fig. 1-1 SYNC ON GREEN Discriminator Circuit
4-18 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

(2) Y/C separation block
A digital comb filter (IC101) is used to separate the luminance signal (Y) and chroma signal (C) of a
composite video signal.
The input composite video signal is passed through a band rejection filter (FL101), amplified by
about four times, and input to pin 15 of IC101. The separated luminance signal is output from pin 6
and passed through a band rejection filter. After that, the signal is input to the video switch (IC104)
that switches the luminance signal of an S video signal. In the same manner as described above, a
chroma signal is output from pin 8 and input through a band rejection filter to the same video switch.
C127 A+5V C135

C125 47uF L103 0.1uF Q111
0.1uF 6.3V 1uH 2SC1623-T1-L5L6
Q107
R103 2SC1623-T1-L5L6
27k Q101 C104 R118 R150
C101 0.1uF 2.2k Q105 1k
47uF R105 2SC1623-T1-L5L6 2SC1623-T1-L5L6 C130 C137 R152
CL101 6.3V 100 47uF 47uF 33
C109
22uF IC101 6.3V 6.3V FL102 Q109
Q103 6.3V MC141627FT C128 R140
5 4 3 6
XN4501-TW
1 4 XN1501-TX 1k 1 4
12
44
18
0.1uF
7
FL101 A_GND 5 4 O1 I1
2 5 2 7 2 5 C145
VCC_AD
OVCC
VCC_D
NC
VCC_DA
R111 IN LPF OUT 0.1uF
1
R101 R104 1k D102 C114 FG1 G1 G2 G3 1 FG2 R144

22k 10k 5 4 3 6 3 1SS123-T1 22uF 33 3 6
5 4 O1 I1 6.3V 13 12 10 9 1 14
2 7 15 6
2
IN LPF OUT VIN YOUT R148

FG1 G1 G2 G3 1 FG2 C107 470
R123 C117
3
4pF 1k C112 0.001uF C138

13 12 10 9 1 14 0.1uF 45 8 47uF R138 R154 R156
FSC COUT 6.3V 2.2k 1.8k 2.2k
20 R146
CLK_AD 2.2k
R110 R114 R117 R120 R121 R125 33
1k 1k 1.5k 1k 390 1.5k C110 D7
22uF 42 34 R142
6.3V VH D6 1k
41 35 C146
BYPASS D5 0.1uF
46 36
N/M D4
47 37
PAL/NTSC D3
48 38 Q112
COMB/BPF D2 C136 2SC1623-T1-L5L6
39 0.1uF
D1 A-5V
21 40 Q108 R151
MODE0 D0 560
22 2SC1623-T1-L5L6 R153
R126 MODE1
10k 23 25 33
TE0 C7 FL103
24 26 R141
Q110
TE1 C6 1k 5 4 3 6 XN4501-TW 1 4
C118 27 5 4 O1 I1
0.1uF C5 2 7 2 5 C147
Q106 13 28 IN LPF OUT
0.1uF
DTC124EKA-T146 RTP C4 FG1 G1 G2 G3 1 FG2 R145
C119 14 29 3 6
RBT C3 13 12 10 9 1 14 33 CL109
0.1uF 30
C120 C2 R149
0.1uF 9 31 560
REF_DA C1
32 R139 R155 R157
R131 C0 2.2k 1.8k 2.2k
10k 10 R147
IBIAS 2.2k
16 C132
R132 CLOUT 10uF R137
47 4 17 16V 10k R143
FILIN CLC C131 1k
1 0.022uF C148
PCO 0.1uF
3
BIAS
R128 R133 R134
GND_AD
GND_D1
GND_D2
GND_DA
33k 10k 150k

11
19
43
C115
5
10uF
16V
R129
100
Fig. 1-2 Y/C Separation Block
(3) Composite sync signal separation circuit

A composite sync signal (CSYNC) is separated by IC201.
The composite sync signal of the Y signal input to pin 6 of IC201 is separated by IC201, and the Y
signal is output from pin 3. The output signal at pin 3 is positive-synchronous. Therefore, the output
signal is inverted by Q201 so that it is negative-synchronous.
DEC_Y DEC_C D_SYNC

TP201 TP202 TP205
007-K4 DEC_Y
007-K3 DLYD_SYNC
007-K4 DEC_C
IC201 R212
R201 BA7046F 7 330
1k C204
CL201 8 VCC 6 1uF
010-B2 *EXT_CSYNC R202 PHCOMP VIN
10k
Q201 3
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 SYNCOUT
2 1
HDOUT HOSC
R209
4 470k
R206 C205
VDOUT 100k 0.001uF
GND
5
C202 C203
0.1uF 22uF
6.3V
Fig. 1-3 Composite Sync Signal Separation Circuit
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-19

(4) Decoder block
On this board, the Y/C jungle (CXA2076Q IC203) for a color television is used for decoding of a
video signal. This circuit is compatible with both NTSC and PAL systems. It integrates luminance
signal processing, chroma signal processing, RGB signal processing, and sync signal processing into
one chip. Each adjustment and setting are controlled by I2CBUS.
The input luminance and chroma signals are input to pins 55 and 57 of IC203. After each processing
has been performed, the input signal is output from pins 22, 24, and 26 as an RGB signal.
A VBS/S video signal is delayed by the processing in IC203. Therefore, the signal passed through a
delay line (DL101) of 350 ns is used for sync separation so as to make the timing of a video signal
coincide with that of a sync signal. (Input signal at pin 56)
The hue and color that the user adjusts are adjusted by IC203.
IC202 is a 1H CCD delay line for PAL.
A+9V
L201
1uH
Q205
2SC1623-T1-L5L6
R220 C241
2.2k 47uF
16V
Q204 C232 R230
47uF C233 C244 C257
2SA812-T1-M5M6 16V 0.1uF 2.7k 0.1uF R232 0.1uF
1k
R222
R219 100 R231
1.8k R221 1k
470 C234
100pF
C220
C227 2.2uF R233

1uF 50V 1k
50V
X203 50MHz
A_GND
0.01uF
C236
0.0047uF
0.1uF
C242
330k
R223
C238
0.0047uF
0.47uF
10k
R225
C225
C224
C245
41 R227 470
0.1uF
5.6k
R229
R217 C249
220 0.1uF
R218
220
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SDA
SCL
VM
SYNCOUT
HSIN
VSIN
VSFIL
DVCC2
IREF
DGND
CERA
AFCFIL
L2FIL
AFCPIN/HOFF
HDOUT
DVCC1
SAWOSC
VAGCSH
E-WOUT
C217 10uF 16V

BLHOLD VD+OUT/VPROT
C212 0.1uF 52 32
CVIN VD-OUT/VPROT C250
C213 0.47uF 53 31 10uF
DCTRAN VTIM 16V
C218 10uF 16V 54 30 R240
YIN ABLFIL R234 1.5k
C214 10uF 16V 55 29 C252 1k
EXTSYNCIN ABLIN/VCOMP 10uF R236
C215 0.47uF 56 28 16V 4.7k
CIN IKIN
C216 0.1uF 57 27
TEST IC203 BOUT R235 4.7k
C219 47uF 16V 58 CXA2076Q-TL 26 C253 0.1uF
CL206 SVCC1 BSH
C211 470pF 59 25
APCFIL GOUT
60 24 C254 0.1uF
X443 GSH
C210 R214 R252 61 23
0.47uF 15k 39 X358 ROUT
62 22 R239
NC RSH C255 4.7k
63 21 0.1uF
C208 X201 R215 FSCOUT SVCC2
4.43 15pF 4.433619MHz 470 64 20
-RY_OUT
-BY_OUT
SCMREF
-RY_IN
-BY_IN
SCPOUT
SGND1
SGND2
CT201
YOUT
YRET
R1IN
G1IN
B1IN
R2IN
G2IN
B2IN
X202
YS1
YS2
30pF NM 3.579545MHz
YM
C209 R237
15pF 4.7k
10
11
C235 0.01uF 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
R216
1
2
3
4
0.1uF 5
6
7
0.1uF 8
9
1.5k TP203
C230
C226
CT202
30pF NM TP204
0.01uF
C259
0.01uF
C256 R238
C239
C237
3.58 CL202 0.1uF 47uF 4.7k

C228 16V
100
R228
DEC_YOUT 0.1uF
FSC
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
C243
C246
C248
C258
R226 1M 0.1uF
C221 C222
0.001uF C231
0.001uF 0.001uF 1
16 VDD 11
VI_RY VO_RY
C251
10uF
14 12 16V
VI_BY VO_BY
C247
5 2 0.1uF
SAND AB
C223 R224
1uF 10k 6 IC202
VCOIN CXL5520M-T4
GND
8
Fig. 1-4 Decoder Block
4-20 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

(5) HD generation circuit
The HD signal output from pin 37 of IC203 is adjusted to the proper phase and pulse width by IC207
(monostable multivibrator) and sent to the frame memory block as an HD (horizontal sync) signal for
fetching memory. AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) processing is performed for this HD signal.
A+5V
R241 R246
3.9k IC207 (1/3) 6.8k
MC74HC4538AFEL
H POSI
3
IC207 (2/3)
2
C261 RV201
47uF 2.2k MC74HC4538AFEL
6.3V
1
1 2 15 14
C CR 6 C CR 10
Q Q
5 11
4 7 12 9
Q Q AFC_HD 010-B1
RD RD
C263 3 13 C268
0.001uF 0.001uF
(6) Demodulation axis correction circuit

Since, in a television circuit (IC203) for the consumer, the demodulation axis is not orthogonal for
NTSC, a matrix circuit (R243 to R251) is inserted into an RGB signal line so as to correct the
demodulation axis to an orthogonal axis. For PAL, the demodulation axis is orthogonal.
Demodulation is not related when an RGB signal is selected. In this case, therefore, the matrix circuit
must be turned off. The matrix circuit is switched to ON or OFF by IC205 and IC206.
R250
470
IC205 C266
TC7S66F(TE85R) 0.1uF
R243
470
5 R248
1 2 2.2k
GND
4 3
IC206
TC7S66F(TE85R) R251
R249 470
5 C267
1 2 0.1uF 4.7k
GND
4 3 R244
10k
IC204
TC7W00F(TE12R)
8
1 VCC 7
1A 1Y
2
1B
5 3
2A 2Y C265
6 0.1uF
2B
GND Q206
4
DTC124EKA-T146
Fig. 1-5 Demodulation Axis Correction Circuit
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-21

(7) AGC (Automatic Gain Control) circuit
This unit mounts a peak AGC circuit that has actual results on the medical market.
The peak value of the RGB signal output from IC203 is sampled by Q304, Q305, and Q306. The
resultant signal is passed through a low-pass filter (R315 and C312) and then input to the operational
amplifier (IC302). The control level is properly adjusted by IC302. The input signal is then passed
through a switch (IC307) for manual gain adjustment (output signal at pin 3 of IC303) and input to the
control pin of GCA (Gain Control Amplifier)(IC304 to IC306).
IC306
BA7655AF-E2
C318 8
R313 47uF
1.8k 6.3V 1 VCC 3
IN1 OUT1
Q306 2
1 2 4 XN2501-TX CTL1
C325 C332
FL303 0.1uF 7 47uF
5 6.3V
3 5 IN2 OUT2
R322 8 5 4 1 9 3 6
1k 8 5 4 1 O3 O2 I2 CL315 6
2 7
IN LPF OUT CTL2
Q303 FG1 G1 G2 G3 G4 O1 I1 FG2 GND
XN4601-TW 6 1 4
19 18 16 15 10 13 12 20
5 2
R310 R319
33 1.8k
4 3 C329 R337
0.1uF 2.2k
R327 C321
1k 0.1uF
A+9V
IC302
LM358PSR
R342 IC309
C313 R323 10k LM358PSR
10uF 8.2k 8 8
16V VCC
3 VCC 1 IC307 3 1
IN+1 OUT1 IN+1 OUT1
2
IN-1
TC4W53F(TE12R) 2
IN-1 C350
R314
0 R315 5 7 5 7 0.1uF
2.2k IN+2 OUT2 8 5 IN+2 OUT2
6
IN-2 VDD A
Q307 6
IN-2
GND C316 CL317 1
6 DTC124EKA-T146 GND
C311 C312 R324 R329 7
2.7k 4 470 0.1uF 4
10uF 47uF R316 R328 INH VSS VEE
16V 22k C326 3
6.3V 15k 0.1uF 2 4
R325
10k
D301
UDZ-TE-17-4.7B
Fig. 1-6 AGC Circuit
(8) EVR (electronic volume) adjustment circuit

Adjustment is partially performed using an electronic volume by IC303.
IC303 has a five-channel internal DA converter. The four channels of it are used for “VBS gain”,
“offset”, “AGC gain”, and “manual gain”, respectively. Adjustment is performed by I2CBUS.
(9) EEPROM
EEPROM (IC301) is mounted to store the setting and adjustment values of this board. This EEPROM
writes or reads data by I2CBUS.
4-22 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2. Output Signal Processing Block (Encoder Block)
(1) Video encoder block
On this board, BH7243KV (IC407)(made by ROHM) is used as the encoder of a video signal. This
circuit incorporates an eight-bit, three-channel DA converter and video encoder. By inputting a
subcarrier and composite sync signal, an eight-bit RGB digital signal can be converted into a
composite video signal by one chip. The output of RGB, S video, and composite video signals can be
driven in 75 ohms. Moreover, this circuit has an internal OSD (On Screen Display) selector switch.
Setting and adjustment are all performed by I2CBUS. An OSD character signal is sent from the SY-
282 board.
R418 33
C419 0.1uF
33 CL404
R417
RDA4
RDA5
RDA6
RDA7
L402 R416 33
C435
100uF
6.3V
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
C410 C411
0.1uF 47uF
DVDD
VCLK
RDATA4
RDATA5
RDATA6
RDATA7
OSDCLK
SDA
SCL
VREG
AGND1
SCIN
CSYNCIN
SYNIN
NT/PAL
NC3
6.3V
C434
0.1uF
RDA3
RDATA3 SYNCOUT
RDA2 33 16
RDATA2 BFPOUT
RDA1 34 15
RDATA1 YTRAP
RDA0 35 14
RDATA0 VOUT
GDA7 36 13
GDATA7 TEST
GDA6 37 12
GDATA6 COUT
GDA5 38 11
GDATA5 YOUT
GDA4 39 10 L404
GDATA4 AVCC2
GDA3 40 9
GDATA3 AGND2
GDA2 41 8
GDATA2 BOUT
GDA1 42 7
GDATA1 GOUT
GDA0 43 6
GDATA0 ROUT
BDA7 44 5
BDATA7 NC2
BDA6 45 4
BDATA6 NC1
BDA5 46 3
BDATA5 OSDOFF
BDA4 47 2
BDATA4 OSDSW
48 1
BDACOUT
GDACOUT
RDACOUT
BDATA3
BDATA2
BDATA1
BDATA0
DACOFF
AVCC1
DGND
OSDR
OSDG
OSDB
RIN
GIN
BIN
BDA7-0
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
IC407
BH7243KV
BDA3
BDA2
BDA1
BDA0
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
C421
C422
C426
C428
C432
C425
C429
BDA7-0
C431
6.3V
47uF
GND
TP403
Fig. 1-7 Video Encoder Circuit
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-23

(2) Sync generator block
A sync signal for the monitor output must be generated by this unit when a memory image is selected
for the monitor output or when no input signal exists. This circuit is peripheral circuit IC406.
IC406 is a sync signal generator compatible with NTSC and PAL systems. IC406 generates video
pulses (CSYNC, ODD/EVEN, HD, VD, and SC signals) by inputting a clock. These video pulses are
sent to IC407 and a frame memory block.
NTSC and PAL are switched by Q408. For NTSC, the X401 block is turned on, and a clock of
14.31818 MHz is sent. For PAL, the X402 and X403 blocks are turned on, and clocks of 14.1875
MHz and 17.734475 MHz are sent, respectively. For PAL, a subcarrier (SC signal) is synchronized
with a horizontal sync signal by VCXO (peripheral circuits Q407 and Q409).
Q405
DTA124EKA-T146 Q406
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 4.7uH
L403
C416 Q407 R420 C430 Q409
0.1uF 2SC1623-T1-L5L6 6.8k 0.1uF 2SC1623-T1-L5L6
R413
C408 6.8k
0.1uF X401 IC405 VCO DC
1
3
14.318182MHz TC4W53F(TE12R) X402 TP406

C423 R426
1
3
8 5 39pF 4.7k
C417 C433
0.001uF 0.001uF R422 CL408
2
4
C412 VDD A 6 100k

47pF 1
C4370.1uF
R427 220k
CT401 7
2
4
20pF INH VSS VEE

C415 2 4 3 1T362A-M20E-T8A
1
0.001uF C436
C409 D401 2.2uF R428
10pF R415 R419 C424 R425 10k
1k 1k 39pF 10k 50V
2
C413
R414 47pF R421 C427 CT402
14.3 10k 10k 33pF 20pF 14.1
NM
C418 0.1uF
C420
47uF
6.3V
IC406
28 CXD1217Q-T4
17 VDD 22
OSC HCOMOUT
Q410 Q411
8 DTA124EKA-T146 2SC1623-T1-L5L6
4FSCIN L405
TP404 17M 4.7uH
7 CL406
4FSCOUT
R423 R443
1.5k R424 6.8k
24 TP405 4.7k C438 X403
CLIN 14M 0.1uF 17.734475MHz
Q408 C454
30 23 CL407 DTC124EKA-T146 0.001uF
OFLD1 CLOUT C452
3 47pF
OFLD Q412
5
OLALT CT403 C439 R444 DTC124EKA-T146
31 19 20pF 10pF 10k
OBF/COLB MODE1 C453
4 20 17.7 47pF
OBLK MODE2 R445
2 18 1k
OSYNC EXT
10 13
OVD LALTRI
6 21
OHD HRI
26 29
CL405 OFH VRI
15 14
O2FH TEST
VSS
12
Fig. 1-8 Sync Generator Block
4-24 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-3. Operation Description of Print Control Block Circuit (PRT-13 Board)
Outline
The PRT-13 board consists of a mechanical control block and head control block.
4-3-1. CPU Flowchart
START
Initialize
MAIN:
Mechanical status flag Status processing
Command flag Command execution
4-3-2. CPU Memory Map
The memory map of CPU is shown below.
00000
Start ROM
20000
Flash ROM
40000
PQC IC
60000
γ RAM
80000
EX I/O
A0000
(PDSP)
C0000
Line number correction ROM
E0000
Color balance PLD
FFF10
External address
FFF1C
Internal I/O register
FFFFF
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-25

4-3-3. Outline of Motor Drive Function Blocks
The motor drive circuit of a mechanical control block consists of the following circuits.
. Fan motor drive circuit
. Ribbon motor drive circuit x 2
. Paper feed/delivery motor drive circuit
. Head motor drive circuit
. Tray motor drive circuit
. Platen motor drive circuit
1. Fan motor drive circuit

The fan motor is driven by turning on the transistor (Q616) on the SE-539 board using the control signal
from pin 11 of IC9. The fan motor is rotated when the head temperature exceeds the fixed value during
printing and in the standby state.
SE-539 PRT-13
FAN_MOTOR_BLOCK
+12V
FAN_MTR
CN602
CL640
1 HED_FAN
CL641
2 GND
C632 C633
10uF 0.1uF
16V
IC601 (2/9)
CN603 FAN_MTR SN74LV541ANSR
R649 CN601 CN601
1 HED_FAN 1k CL644 IC9
17 3 1P 30P
2 GND 15P
Q616
2SD999-T1CK
R680 +12GND
0
CN606 IC_FAN
CL642
1 HED_FAN
CL643
2 GND
4-26 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

2. Ribbon motor drive circuit (Take-up and supply drives)
Motor drive circuits IC609 and IC606 on the SE-539 board are controlled by the control signals at pins 95
and 96 (take-up) and pins 97 and 98 (supply) of IC5 (CPU) on the PRT-13 board. The motor is
accelerated and decelerated proportionally to the reference voltages at pins 20 and 21 of IC11 on the
PRT-13 board.
SE-539 PRT-13
RIBBON_TAKE_UP_MOTOR_BLOCK
+12V
RBN_TKUP_MTR0
RBN_TKUP_MTR1
RBN_TKUP_REF
R650
2.2
C624
100uF
C623 16V
IC609 0.1uF +5V
BA6219B 8 7 +12GND R678 R679
2 VCC2 VCC1 5 TP614 TP615 TP616 10k 10k
CN604 OUT1 IN1
7P CL622 C617
0.33uF 3 CN610 CN601
CL623 CD1 CL628 IC5
22P 9P
8P 95P
10 6 CL629 23P 8P
OUT2 IN2 96P
CL630 24P 7P
9 IC11
CD2
20P
4
VREF
GND
C625
1 C622 0.1uF
0.1uF
+12GND
SE-539 PRT-13
RIBBON_SUPPLY_MOTOR_BLOCK
+12V
R606
2.2
RBN_SPLY_MTR0
RBN_SPLY_MTR1
RBN_SPLY_REF
C611
C608 100uF
0.1uF 16V
IC606 +5V
BA6219B 8 7 +12GND
2 VCC2 VCC1 5 10k 10k
CN604 OUT1 IN1 TP602 TP603 TP604
3P CL600
C601 3 CN610 CN601
4P CL601 0.33uF CD1 IC5
CL612 18P 13P
97P
10 6 CL613 19P 12P
OUT2 IN2 98P
CL614 20P 11P
9 IC11
CD2
21P
4
VREF
GND
C612
1 0.1uF 0.1uF
C605
+12GND
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-27

3. Paper feed motor drive circuit
Motor drive circuit IC610 on the SE-539 board is controlled by the control signals at pins 99 and 100 of
IC5 (CPU) on the PRT-13 board. The motor is accelerated and decelerated by PWM control.
SE-539 PRT-13
+24V
D605
10E-2FD
D607
10E-2FD
C620
47uF
35V
C646
47uF
35V
LOAD_MOTOR_BLOCK
C618
0.1uF R632
50V 2.2k
R629 R628
2.2 2.2 R633 LOAD_MTR0
+24GND CN610 CN601
1.8k IC5
TP612 26P 5P
IC610 Q612 99P
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 27P 4P
CN605 7 2 STA457C CL626 +5V 100P
6P CL620 3 VCC2 VCC1 1 8 9
OUT1 B1 R638 IC611 IC612
4 R630 4.7k SN74LV32ANSR SN74LV32ANSR
B2 4.7k
7P CL621 8 6
OUT2 B3 IC605 (4/7)
9 R631 SN74LV04ANSR
B4 4.7k +24GND 14 14 C619 C621
GND2 GND1 +24V 0.1uF 100uF
3 VCC 1 R665 3 VCC 1
10 5 1Y 1A 1Y 1A 25V
2 47k 2
1B R663 1B
R634 6 4 10k 6 4
2.2k 2Y 2A 2Y 2A GND
5 5
2B R664 2B
8 9 10k 8 9 R661
+24GND +24GND +24GND 3Y 3A 3Y 3A
+24GND 10 10 10k
D606 D608 R666
10E-2FD 10E-2FD R635 3B 3B
1.8k TP613 11 12 47k 11 12
Q613 4Y 4A 4Y 4A R662
13 13 10k
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 4B 4B
CL627 GND GND
10 11 7 7
R640
4.7k
IC605 (5/7)
SN74LV04ANSR
+24GND
LOAD_MTR1 GND
C650 C651 C652 C653
0.001uF 0.001uF 0.001uF 0.001uF
4. Tray motor drive circuit

Motor drive circuit IC607 on the SE-539 board is controlled by the control signals at pins 8 and 9 of IC5
(CPU) on the PRT-13 board. The motor is accelerated and decelerated proportionally to the reference
voltage at pin 6 of IC11 on the PRT-13 board.
SE-539 PRT-13
TRAY_MOTOR_BLOCK
+12V
R651
2.2
TRAY_MTR1
TRAY_MTR0
C640
TRAY_REF
C637 100uF
0.1uF 16V
IC607
BA6219B 8 7 +12GND +5V
2 VCC2 VCC1 5
CN604 OUT1 IN1 TP618 TP620 TP622
5P CL638 R676 R677
C630 3 10k 10k CN610 CN601
6P CL639 0.33uF CD1 IC5
CL645 28P 3P
8P
10 6 CL646 29P 2P
OUT2 IN2 9P
CL647 30P 1P
IC11
9
CD2 6P
4
VREF
GND
C641
1 C635 0.1uF
0.1uF
+12GND
4-28 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5. Head motor drive circuit
Motor drive circuit IC608 on the SE-539 board is controlled by the control signals at pins 93 and 94 of
IC5 (CPU) on the PRT-13 board.
SE-539 PRT-13
HEAD_POSITION_MOTOR_BLOCK
+24V C609 C645
47uF 47uF
35V 35V
HED_MTR0 HED_MTR1 C606 +5V
0.1uF C639
TP600 TP601 50V 100uF R637
25V 10k
CN604 C638 R636
1P CL602 +24GND 0.1uF 10k
2P D1
2 4 MA111-TX
7
CL603
2
RY601 C634
16
9
6
0.1uF R609
50V 0 GND
VBB2
VBB1
VCC
14
1
SL1 NM
6 8 3 1 5 10 14 3 VCC 1 CN610 CN601
OUTA MODE 1Y 1A TP625 IC5
7 2 2P 29P
SL2 PHASE 1B 93P
GND 15 8 6 4
OUTB ENABLE 2Y 2A TP626 94P
IC608 1 5 3P 28P
CL611 BRAKE 2B
CL610
R603
A3952SB 11 8 9
1
SENSE R610 3Y 3A TP627 IC9
R601 0 10 4P 27P
1 3B 8P
3 2 11 12
RC REF 4Y 4A
R600 13
GND2
GND1
GND4
GND3
1 4B
GND R639
10k
13
12
7
5
4
C636 C607 C610 IC613

0.001uF 0.1uF 100uF
50V 25V SN74LV32ANSR
GND
R607
100k +24GND
6. Platen motor drive circuit

The platen is driven from a stepping motor through a belt.
The excitation system of the stepping motor is based on one-/two- phase excitation. The control signals
of each phase (A, A, B, and B) are output at pins 2 to 5 of IC5 (CPU). Drive circuit IC602 on the SE-539
board drives the stepping motor by chopper drive.
By switching the control signals at pins 7 and 8 on the PRT-13 board, the reference voltage input to pins 3
and 14 of IC602 on the SE-539 board changes to control the torque of a motor.
+5V
SE-539 IC604
SN74LV161ANSR PRT-13
+24V 16
PLATEN_MOTOR_BLOCK IC605 (3/7) 14
QA
VCC
LD
9 C616
0.1uF
SN74LV04ANSR 13 3
PLT_MTR QB A
+5V 12 4
CN601 QC B
1P CL604 IC603 11
QD C
5
2P CL605 SN74LV74ANSR 6
D
3P CL606 +5V 14
4P CL607 VCC 4 2 GND
12 7 SLA7024M 1SD CLK
5P CL608 5 2
6P CL609 8
VSB VSA
6
IC602 R621 1Q 1D
3 7
4.7k
OUTA INA 1CP ENP
1 5 6 1 15 10
OUTA INA Q606 1Q 1CD RCO ENT
2SB798-T1-DLDK R623 10 6 5 1
1k 2SD CLR PWUP
18 17 9 12 GND
OUTB INB +5V R620 2Q 2D TP608
11 16 C613 R613 820 11 8
OUTB INB 0.0022uF 1 2CP CN610 CN601
+5V 8 13
GND CL624 IC5
REF 2Q 2CD 11P 20P
9 R617 GND C615 2P
RSA TP605 390 0.1uF 12P 19P
R605 R614
2.2k +24GND
Q607 7 PWDWN
13P 18P
3P
R602 47k 3 R619
2SC1623-T1-L5L6 TP609 4P
REFA CL615 82 GND 14P 17P
47k 14 5P
REFB R622
2 1k CL625 6P
TDA R615
13 10 2.2k R618 7P
TDB RSB 82
C600 C602 GNDB GNDA
C603 C604 +5V
47uF 47uF 470pF 470pF 15 4 C614 R616
35V 35V GND GND
0.0022uF 1 PLT_A PLT_A
+24GND TP606 TP610
R624 R625 R626 R627
+24GND GND 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k IC601 (3/9)
CL616 SN74LV541ANSR
CL617 16 4 IC601 (4/9)
15 5 SN74LV541ANSR
CL618 IC601 (5/9) TP607 TP611 15P 16P
CL619 14 6 SN74LV541ANSR 16P 15P
13 7
IC601 (6/9) PLT_B PLT_B
SN74LV541ANSR
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-29

IC5, pin 6 IC5, pin 7 Output current value
Normal H L 860 mA
Power up L L 1200 mA
Power down H H 430 mA
4-3-4. Outline of Sensor Detection Circuits
A sensor is mainly classified into the following three types.

A ribbon code sensor, paper jamming sensor, and platen chuck sensor perform the A/D conversion input
according to the change with the passage of time in a sensor level.
Interruptive type
. Platen home position sensor
. Ribbon take-up FG sensor
. Ribbon supply FG sensor
. Ribbon cartridge sensor
. Head position sensor
. Head position FG sensor
. Paper feed timing sensor
. Delivery timing sensor
. Paper feed FG sensor
. Paper sensor
. Tray position sensor
Reflective type
. Platen chuck sensor
. Paper jamming sensor
Transmission type
. Ribbon code sensor
4-30 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

1. Platen home position sensor
Route: SE-540 to SE-539 to PRT-13
TP: TP558/PRT-13 board
Function: Discriminates the home position of a platen.
Level: H Home position
L Positions other than home position
SE-540 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R152 R566
150 10k
CN1 CN101
1 3 1P 1P CN150 CN401
C2 C1 IC9
PH1 0.01uF 0.01uF 2P 2P 6P 25P 9 11
RPI-352 NM NM 37P
2 4
IC452 (6/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
3P 3P
GND
PLT_POS
2. Ribbon take-up FG sensor

Function: Detects the number of rotations on the take-up side of a ribbon.
Level: Rectangular wave output
SE-545 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R153 R527
150 10k
CN6 CN101
1 3 1P 4P CN150 CN401
C14 C13 IC5
PH7 0.01uF 0.01uF 2P 5P 13P 18P 5 6
RPI-325 NM 87P
NM
2 4 IC4 (3/7)
SN74LV14ANSR
3P 6P
GND
RBN_TKUP_FG
3. Ribbon supply FG sensor

Function: Detects the number of rotations on the supply side of a ribbon.
SE-546 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
R157 +5V
150
R528
10k
CN7 CN102
1 3 1P 6P CN150 CN401
IC5
C16 C15 2P 7P 14P 17P 9 8
PH8 0.01uF 0.01uF 88P
RPI-352 NM NM
2 4 IC4 (4/7)
SN74LV14ANSR
3P 8P
GND RBN_SPLY_FG
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-31

4. Ribbon cartridge sensor
Function: Discriminates whether a ribbon cassette is inserted into the mechanical unit.
Level: H A ribbon cassette is set.
L A ribbon cassette is not set.
SE-544 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R156
220
CN5 CN102 R524
10k
2P 2P
CN150 CN401
IC9
4P 4P 9P 22P 3 17
36P
D2 PH6 IC406 (2/9)
GL480 PT480F C12 C10
0.01uF 0.01uF SN74LV541ANSR
NM NM
5P 5P
GND
RBN_CST
5. Head position sensor
SE-547 SE-539 PRT-13

+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V
R566 R569 R571

R163 R164 R165 R166 10k 10k 10k
150 150 150 150 IC452 (1/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
CN8 CN105 IC452 (2/9)
1 3 1 3 1P 1P CN150 CN401
SN74LV541ANSR
PH10 IC9
PH9 2P 2P 2P 29P 3 17
RPI-352 RPI-352 43P
C20 C19 C18 C17 3P 3P 3P 28P 8 12
0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 42P
2 4 2 4 NM NM NM NM 4P 4P 4P 27P 7 13
41P
5P 5P 5P 26P 6 14
40P
6P 6P
7P 7P IC452 (3/9)
8P 8P R572
SN74LV541ANSR
9P 9P 10k IC452 (7/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
1 3 1 3 +5V
PH11 PH12
RPI-352 RPI-352
C24 C23 C22 C21
2 4 2 4 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF
NM NM NM NM
10P 10P
GND
HED_POS
TP: TP555, TP556, TP560, and TP561/PRT-13 board
Function: Discriminates the thermal head position.
Level:
Sensor position HED_POS0 HED_POS1 HED_POS3 HED_POS3
(IC9, pin 43) (IC9, pin 42) (IC9, pin 41) (IC9, pin 40)
PRINT L L L L
PFEED L L H L
FF2 L H L L
FF1 L H H L
HOME H L L L
CHUCK H L H L
4-32 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

6. Head position FG sensor
Function: Detects the number of rotations in a head motor.
SE-548 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R158
150
R530
10k
CN9 CN102
1 3 1P 9P CN150 CN401
C26 C25 IC5
PH13 0.01uF 0.01uF 2P 10P 17P 14P 5 6
RPI-352 NM NM 17P
2 4 IC4 (3/7)
SN74LV14ANSR
3P 11P
GND HED_POS_FG
7. Paper feed timing sensor

Function: Discriminates whether print paper was fed properly or whether print paper is not jammed at a
paper feed port in the standby state.
Level: H Print paper exists at a paper feed port.
L Print paper does not exist at a paper feed port.
SE-550 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R155 R515
150 10k
CN11 CN101
1 3 1P 10P CN150 CN401
IC9
PH15 C29 2P 11P 19P 12P 6 14
RPI-5100 0.01uF 10P
NM
2 4 IC406 (3/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
3P 12P
GND
LOAD_TMG
8. Delivery timing sensor

Function: Discriminates the mechanical timing during delivery operation and whether print paper is not
jammed at a delivery port.
Level: H Print paper exists at a delivery port.
L Print paper does not exist at a delivery port.
SE-551 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R167 R516
150 10k
CN12 CN106
1 3 1P 1P CN150 CN401
IC9
PH16 C32 C31 2P 2P 20P 11P 7 13
GP1S54 0.01uF 0.01uF 10P
NM NM
2 4 IC406 (4/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
3P 3P
GND
EJCT_TMG
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-33

9. Paper feed FG sensor
Function: Detects the amount of print paper fed to the platen chuck position through a paper feed timing
sensor.
SE-552 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R154 R529
150 10k
CN13 CN101
1 3 1P 7P CN150 CN401
IC5
PH17 C34 C33 2P 8P 16P 15P 11 10
0.01uF 0.01uF 90P
GP1S54
NM NM IC4 (5/7)
2 4
SN74LV14ANSR
3P 9P
GND
LOAD_FG
10. Paper sensor

Function: Discriminates whether the paper feed tray or print paper is set.
Level: H Print paper is set, or a paper feed tray is set, but no print paper exists.
L Print paper does not exist and a paper feed tray is not set.
SE-553 SE-539 PRT-13

+5V
+5V
R159 R525
150 10k
CN14 CN103
1 3 1P 1P CN150 CN401
C35 C36 IC9
0.01uF 0.01uF 2P 2P 10P 21P 4 16
PH18 NM 12P
GP1S54 NM
2 4 IC406 (5/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
3P 3P
GND
PAPER
4-34 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

11. Tray position sensor
TP: TP577 (TRAY_POS0) and TP559 (TRAY_POS1)/PRT-13 board
Function: Discriminates the position of a paper feed arm and delivery arm.
Level:
Sensor position TRAY_POS0 (IC9, pin 39) TRAY_POS1 (IC9, pin 38)
Home L L
Paper feed L H
Print H L
SE-554 SE-539 PRT-13

+5V +5V
JR3
0
+5V +5V
R160 R161
CN15 CN103 150 150 R567 R570
1 3 1 3 10k 10k
1P 5P
2P 6P CN150 CN401
IC9
PH20 C40 C39 C38 C37 3P 7P 7P 24P
2 4 PH19
RPI-352 2 4 RPI-352 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 39P
NM NM NM NM 4P 8P 8P 23P
38P
5P 9P
GND
TRAY_POS
12. Platen chuck sensor

TP: TP551 (LED) and TP553 (PHTR)/PRT-13 board
Function: Discriminates that paper was fed to the chuck position.
Level: H Print paper does not exist in the chuck position.
L Print paper exists in the chuck position.
SE-541 SE-539 PRT-13

+12V
+5V IC450 (4/4)
IC11
UPC324G2-E1 4 3
R557 + 19P
33 1
- 2
Q450 11
CN2 CN104 CN150 CN401 2SC1523-T1-L5L6
1 3 1P 1P 21P 10P
C4 C3
PH2 0.01uF 0.01uF +5V
GP2S40K NM NM
2 4 R555
2P 2P 22P 9P 15k
IC5
13 -
81P
3P 3P + 14
C551 12
GND 470pF IC450 (3/4)
UPC324G2-E1
GND
PLT_CHUCK
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-35

13. Paper jamming sensor
Function: Discriminates whether print paper was fed properly or whether print paper is not left in the
mechanical unit during standby.
Level: H Print paper exists in the mechanical unit.
L Print paper does not exist in the mechanical unit.
SE-542 SE-539 PRT-13
+5V
+5V
R162 R526
150 10k
CN3 CN104
1 3 1P 4P CN150 CN401
IC5
PH3 2P 5P 11P 20P 5 15
RPI-5100 80P
2 4 IC406 (7/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
3P 6P
GND
PAPER_JAM
14. Ribbon code sensor

TP: TP552 (LED) and TP554 (PHTR)/PRT-13 board
Function: Discriminates the start mark, end mark, or cue mark of a ribbon.
Level: H Detects the cue mark of each color.
L Others
SE-544 SE-539 PRT-13 +5V IC450 (2/4)
UPC324G2-E1 IC11
10
R556 16P
33 8 +
- 9
Q453
CN5 CN102 CN150 CN401 2SC1523-T1-L5L6
1P 1P 25P 6P
+5V
R555
3P 3P 26P 5P 22k
D1 IC5
GL514A PH5 6 -
C11 C9
PT501A 0.01uF 0.01uF 78P
NM NM + 7
5P 5P 5
C552
IC450 (1/4)
GND
470pF
UPC324G2-E1 RBN_CD
GND
Optional unit
The motor of a paper eject unit is driven by the control signal from pin 16 of paper eject motor drive
circuit IC9. The attachment or detachment of the unit is recognized at TP505. The motor is driven in
only the timing of delivery.
SE-539 PRT-13
KICK_OUT_MOTOR_BLOCK
+12V
Q614 R646 C626 C627

2SB962Z-T2P 220 0.1uF 100uF
16V
R647 CN610 CN601

1k Q615 +12GND IC9
CN605 2SC1623-T1-L5L6 9P 22P
13P
1P CL631 R643 R644 R645 12 8 7P 24P
15 15 15 15P
2P CL632 R648 R642 CL635
3P CL633 4.7k 10k
4P CL634 IC601 (7/9)
SN74LV541ANSR
GND +12GND
4-36 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-3-5. Head Control Block
The head control block corrects the parallel print data per line from the VPR-63 board and transfers it to
the thermal head for printing.
The head control block consists of the following five blocks.

. γ RAM that γ-corrects the parallel print data from VPR-63 board
. Image processing circuit (picture quality control IC) that performs pattern recognition interpolation,
edge emphasis, and thermal storage correction
. Head drive circuit that PWM-converts parallel data and transfers print data to the thermal head
. Line number correction circuit (voltage drop control IC) that corrects the voltage drop due to the
common resistor of a thermal head
. Head voltage correction circuit
. PLD for color balance adjustment
Print data is received from the VPR-63 board as parallel data, γ-corrected, and processed by a PQC
circuit. After that, the print data is PWM-modulated using a head drive circuit and transferred to the
thermal head.
1. Blocks
γ correction circuit
The print data sent from the VPR-63 board is γ-corrected using the data conversion table of γ RAM
(IC209). Before printing, the γ data of each YMC (L) color corresponding to the temperature correction,
media type, and paper feeding is written in the address of γ RAM.
PQC IC
. Edge emphasis
Performs the edge emphasis that improves the sharpness of an image using a digital filter in the
horizontal and vertical directions.
. Thermal storage correction
Corrects the dullness and unstableness of rising due to the defective thermal response of a head using a
digital filter.
Head drive circuit

. PWM modulation
PWM-modulates eight-bit parallel data and converts it into serial print data.
. Divided print processing
Divides one gradation into four for printing so that the clearance between print lines does not stand out
when the print dot area of a low-density image portion becomes smaller.
Line number correction circuit

The combined resistance of an element decreases when the number of heating resistor elements that
carries a current to the thermal head increases. In this case, the voltage drop due to the common
resistance of a harness cannot be ignored and the print density decreases. Therefore, this circuit controls
the current-carrying time of a head element and corrects the print density.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-37

Head voltage correction
The head voltage can be increased or decreased by changing a VCONT signal. In the correction below, a
VCONT signal is digitally controlled (using software) by using the D/A port output of CPU (IC11).
. Correction by feed pitch
When data is printed at the same head voltage, the print density becomes thicker as the feed pitch
becomes narrower. Therefore, an offset is made in each feed of ordinary horizontal print (FULL, four-
division, and 16-division) and vertical print (two-division and eight-division).
. Correction by thermal head temperature
When data is printed at the same head voltage, a difference occurs in the print density as the head
temperature becomes higher or lower. Therefore, the head voltage is adjusted by the head temperature
just before printing.
PLD for color balance adjustment

A γ table is switched in the timing in which the horizontal and vertical directions of print data were set
when adjusting the color balance. By this, the divided print whose color tone was changed is carried out.
2. Input/output timing
nPRINTING and nHEAD_ACTIVE_IN signals are an enable signal of a thermal head. When these
signals are both “L”, the thermal head enters the print enable state.
An nHEAD_ACTIVE_IN (_P) signal is also used as an enable signal of IC223 and IC226. When this
signal is “L”, IC223 and IC226 are in the print enable state. In this state, the rising edge of a
PRINT_PULSE_IN signal accepts a PQC DMA transfer.
When the next PRINT_PULSE_IN signal is input, it is transferred to the thermal head together with a
shift clock (HEA/D_CLK), data latch output signal (HEAD_LATCH), and strobe output signal
(HEAD_STRB) as eight-port serial data. The DMA transfer of data in the second line is also accepted in
parallel.
The data in the first line that was input as described above is transferred to the head drive circuit in
synchronization with the fourth PRINT_PULSE_IN signal. The data is also output to the thermal head in
synchronization with the fifth PRINT_PULSE_IN signal. Therefore, a PRINT_PULSE_IN signal is more
input to PQC IC than the number of actual print lines by four.
4-38 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-4. Circuit Operation Description of SY-282 and IF-767 Boards
Contents
. Address map
. Circuit operation
. Communication with other boards in unit
. VPR (analog video block) control
. RS communication control
Address map
Address Contents IC CS Remarks
00000h to 3ffffh 256k-byte UV-EPROM IC200 0&1

2
60000h to 60003h LCD IC230 3
80000h to 81fffh 16k-byte EEPROM IC220 4
A0000h to A0001 SCI IC250 5
C0000h Expansion port IC408 6
FF710h to FFF0Fh 2k-byte SRAM IC100 CPU built-in
FFF10h to FFF13 Main and operation keys IC270 7
FFF17h REMOTE3 IC407 7
FFF1Ch to FFFFFh I/O IC100 CPU built-in
4-4-1. Circuit Operation
Reset circuit
The reset circuit uses PST572CMT (IC190). This circuit outputs a low pulse of about 60 msec when Vcc
becomes less than 4.5 V during the power-on or off sequence. The reset pulse is input to the reset pin
(pin 63) of CPU (IC100). The CPU on the SY-282 board is then reset. After the reset is released, the
CPU outputs the reset pulses for other boards from the reset output pins (pins 59 and 60).
C100 TP Object to be reset Remarks
Pin 63 TP953:RESET1 CPU on SY board Output of reset circuit

Pin 59 TP594:RESET2 VPR board and peripheral circuit on SY board
Pin 60 TP596:RESET PRT board
Oscillator circuit
The basic clock (9.8304 MHz) of the SY-282 board that is generated using an oscillator circuit
incorporating a crystal oscillator (X100) and CPU (IC100) can be confirmed at pin 61 [TP955 CLOCK]
of IC100. The clock and frequency-divided clock [TP951 SCI-CLK] are sent to a serial communication
circuit (IC250). The frequency-divided clock varies depending on the baud rate setting.
Baud rate [TP951 SCI-CLK]
1200 19.2 kHz

2400 38.4 kHz
4800 76.8 kHz
9600 153.6 kHz
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-39

Nonvolatile memory
Each menu setting or caption character string is stored in IC220 (NH58V66APF-10Z). Data is read from
the nonvolatile memory when the system starts.
Data [COLOR LOAD] and [USER LOAD] are also stored in IC220.
LED
The PRINT LED (that lights during printing) is controlled in lighting by Q170. A control signal is output
from CPU (pin 94 of IC100). The ALARM LED (that lights when an error occurs in a printer) is
controlled in lighting by Q171. A control signal is output from CPU (pin 95 of IC100).
Buzzer
A buzzer sound pulse is output from CPU (pin 98 of IC100) and driven using a circuit consisting of
Q180, R180, and R181. The buzzer does not sound when [BEEP:OFF] is set in the menu.
Liquid-crystal display (LCD)

The bus control of LCD is performed using general-purpose logic groups IC230 and IC4xx. The display
density of LCD is controlled by IC300, Q160, R160 to R163, and C160. The control signal (analog
voltage value) is output from CPU (pin 85 of IC100) as an analog signal. No display may appear on the
LCD when [LCD-CONT:OFF] is set in the menu.
Screen display
A screen display control signal is generated by IC150. The clock of IC150 is generated using an
oscillator circuit that incorporates C150, C151, L150, and IC150. The OSD HD and OSD VD signal
inputs from the VPR board are required as a timing pulse. The control signal of display data is output
from CPU (pins 23 to 25 of IC100). Characters are actually superimposed using an analog switch on the
VPR-63 board. No screen display may appear when [SOURCE:THRU] or [DISPLAY:OFF] is set in the
menu.
Input of main unit’s key (main key/operation key)

The state of the main unit’s key is processed by IC270, R270 to R277, and R820 to R827 and input
through a data bus to CPU. The timing pulse of a data input signal is output by a circuit consisting of
IC110, D110 to D113, and R110 to R113.
Remote 1 input and infrared remote control reception

An infrared remote control pulse is received using the infrared photosensor in a main key block. The
pulse from the main key is waveform-shaped by IC301 on the SY-282 board and once output to the IF-
767 board. If a wired remote control is connected to the IF-767 board, a wired remote control pulse is
input to the SY-282 board. If it is not connected, the output pulse of a photosensor is input to the SY-282
board. Since a pulse is switched by J1 on the IF-767 board, the wire remote control operation may fail
due to the failure of J1. The pulse from the IF-767 board is waveform-shaped by IC301 on the SY-282
board and input to CPU (pins 99 and 100 of IC100).
Remote 2 input
There are a digital-type remote control (RM-91) and analog-type remote control (FS-36) in J2 on the IF-
767 board. The two types of remote controls can be connected. A digital-type signal is processed by
IC302 and input to CPU (pin 88 of IC100). An analog-type signal is processed by IC300 and input to
CPU (pin 84 of IC100).
4-40 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Remote 2 output
The control signal of a BUSY output signal is output by CPU (pin 93 of IC100) and driven using a buffer
(IC404).
Remote 3 input
The remote control (FS-30) input signal connected to connector CN2 on the IF-767 board is processed by
IC407 and input through a data bus to CPU. The timing pulse of a data input signal is output by IC110.
Remote 3 output
The control signal of a VD output signal is output by the VPR-63 board and driven using an inverter
(IC401).
The control signal of a Light output signal is output by the VPR-63 board and driven using a buffer
(IC404).
The control signal of a Busy output signal is output by the CPU (pin 93 of IC100) and driven using a
buffer (IC404).
Antenna drive circuit

CUP communicates with antenna board (AN-15) control block IC2 (CXD8753Q) using serial data. In the
standby state, an AN_RESET signal is set low to stop the antenna circuit operation.
Signal line name I/O Description
AN_TXD (TP10) Output Communication data (CPU → IC)

AN_RXD (TP6) Input Communication data (IC → CPU)
AN_SCK (TP8) Output Communication clock (SY → IC)
AN_REQ (TP7) Output Send request (SY → IC) L:active
AN_SINT (TP9) Input Send request (IC → SY) L:active
AN_RESET (TP5) Output Reset (SY → IC) L:active
Communication format
System Clock synchronous system

Data length 8 bits
Remarks:
. “CHECK RIBBON 80” is displayed even if an ink ribbon is defective.
. “CHECK RIBBON” is displayed when the ribbon that cannot be used in a model is used.
. The 12 V system on the SY-282 board is used only in an antenna drive circuit.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-41

4-4-2. Communication with Other Boards in Unit
Interface with PRT board

Bi-directional communication is performed by the asynchronous serial communication that uses serial
communication interface CH.0 incorporated into CPU.
SY_PRT_TXD Output Communication data (SY → PRT)

PRT_SY_RXD Input Communication data (PRT → SY)
SY_PRT_RTS Output Communication enable (SY → PRT) L:active
PRT_SY_CTS Input Communication enable (PRT → SY) L:active
System Asynchronous system

Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1
Parity None
Baud rate 19200 bps
Interface with FMY board

Bi-directional communication is performed by the asynchronous serial communication that uses serial
communication interface CH.1 incorporated into CPU.
SY_FMY_TXD Output Communication data (SY → FMY)

FMY_SY_RXD Input Communication data (FMY → SY)
SY_FMY_RTS Output Communication enable (SY → FMY) L:active
FMY_SY_CTS Input Communication enable (FMY → SY) L:active

Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1
Parity None
Baud rate 19200 bps
4-42 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-4-3. VPR (Analog Video Block) Control
I2C bus control

Purpose
Controls the I2C bus circuit on the analog board.
IIC-SCL Output Serial data clock H:active

IIC_SDA Output Serial data H:active
IIC_CTS Input Serial data transfer enable H:active
Functions obtained by I2C bus control

User menu: HUE, COLOR, GAIN, OFFSET, MONI-R, MONI-G, MONI-B, IRE, SYNC ON G,
and INPUT SEL
Service menu: PICTURE, G DRIVE, B DRIVE, SUB-BRIGHT, and VBS Y
Other functions: HALFTONE
Remarks:
The object to be handled is an I2C-compatible circuit on the VPR-63 board. The center value for
adjustment is stored in I2C-EEPROM on the VPR board. During start, the SY-282 board reads data from
I2C-EEPROM and initializes the IC on the VPR-63 board. These set values can be changed (readjusted)
in the service man mode. No communication is performed when I2C-CTS is in the send disable (L) state.
Screen display-related signals

Purpose
Produces a pulse signal for screen display.
OSD-R Output Screen display control data (R) H:active

OSD-G Output Screen display control data (G) H:active
OSD-B Output Screen display control data (B) H:active
OSD_BLK Output Screen display control data (Blanking) H:active
OSD_ON_NOFF Output Batch control of screen display superimposition (yes/no) H:active
OSD_HD Input Timing pulse (H-SYNC) Sync negative
OSD_VD Input Timing pulse (V-SYNC) Sync negative
Input signal switching control

Purpose
Specifies an input signal.
INPUT_SEL1 Contents
L VIDEO/S-VIDEO
H RGB
Remarks:
VIDEO and S-VIDEO are switched by I2C control.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-43

Output video signal
Purpose
Selects an output signal.
THRU_EE Contents
L THROUCH
H EE
Remarks:
This signal is used for control of a relay switch on the IF-764 board.
Video mode (IF-767 board)

Purpose
Confirms the video mode set by the user.
SW_NTSC_NPAL Contents
H NTSC
L PAL
Remarks:
This mode is connected to the NTSC/PAL set switch on the IF-767 board.
4-44 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

4-4-4. RS Communication Control
RS-232C interface
A signal is converted from serial to parallel by IC250 (uPD71051GU) that is connected to CPU via a bus.
Input and output signals are level-converted by IC280 and IC281 (SP232CAN).
The last output signal is as follows:
Active: 8V
Non-active: _8 V
The TP position is as follows:
Active: 0V
Non-active: +5 V
TXD Output Communication data (UP → External)

RXD Input Communication data (External → UP)
RTS Output Communication enable (UP → External)
CTS Input Communication enable (External → UP)
DTR Output Operation status (UP → External)
DSR Input Operation status (External → UP)

Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
Parity None
Baud rate 1200/2400/4800/9600 bps (Menu switching)
Set the transfer rate to 9600 when upgrading the firmware on the PRT-13 board.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 4-45

Section 5
Mechanical Description
5-1. Description of Mechanisms
Major components layout and component names
1 Paper feed tray ![ Platen hatch @\ Ribbon FG

2 Paper feed lever !] Paper jamming sensor @; Paper remover flap
3 Pickup roller !\ Platen temperature sensor @' Ribbon winder
4 Paper holder arm !; Feed flap @, Paper remove lead roller drive
5 Paper feed roller !' Ribbon feed belt
6 Separation roller !, Ribbon folder @. Paper remove timing sensor
7 Paper feed timing sensor !. Head cam #/ Paper remove roller
8 Paper remove lead roller @/ Ribbon #- Paper remove flap
9 Paper lead flap @- Thermal head #= Paper remove lever
0 Direct chuck sensor @= Platen position sensor #[ Paper remove tray
!- Chuck @[ Ribbon cartridge sensor #] Tray motor cam
!= Platen @] Ribbon code sensor
This machine is a dye-sublimation thermal transfer printer designed for longitudinal printing of A5-size media.
The printer is capable of printing 200 sheets of standard ribbon media and 100 sheets of standard paper media.
The printer is available only for UP-50 series media. This printer is not available for UP-5500 and other series as well as
other vendor media.
Please remember that using media of different ribbon or paper type can cause jamming or print errors.
The ribbon holder is not compatible with the UP-5500 series.

The paper feeder tray is compatible with the UP-5500 series.
The paper remove tray is the same as the UP-5500 series.
An anti-jamming cover is provided at the bottom of the printer (located under the platen and shown by the broken line).
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-1
5-1-1. Motors
There are six motors in total for driving the printer. In addition, there are two motors for cooling the
thermal head, and one for cooling the printed circuit board. Also, the switching regulator has one fan
motor for cooling itself.
1 Head motor (DC motor) (forward and reverse)

. Drives the head vertically.
. Drives the platen chuck link.
2 Platen motor (stepping motor) (forward and reverse)
. Drives the platen.
. Opens and closes the chuck (synchronized with platen rotation).
3 Paper feed motor (DC motor) (forward and reverse)
. Drives the pickup roller.
. Drives the paper feed roller and separation roller.
. Drives the paper remove roller and paper remove lead roller.
4 Tray motor (DC motor) (forward and reverse)
. Moves the separation roller.
. Drives the paper lead flap and paper remove flap.
. Drives the paper feed lever.
. Drives the paper remove arm.
. Paper sensor arm is secured.
5 Ribbon take-up motor (DC motor) (forward and reverse)
. Winds up the ribbon.
. Controls ribbon tension.
6 Ribbon supply motor (DC motor) (forward and reverse)
. Rewinds and takes up ribbon slack.
. Controls tension.
7 Head cooling fan motor (forward only)
. Cools the thermal head during printing and prevents overheating.
8 Printed circuit board cooling fan motor (forward only)
. Cools the SE-539 board in synchronization with head fan motor.
5-2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5-1-2. Sensors
The names and functions of sensors are as follows:
No. Name Type Function
1 Head position sensor Transmission x 4 Detects the position of the head.

Photo-interrupter
2 Head FG sensor Transmission x 1 Detects rotation of the head motor.
Photo-interrupter
3 Platen home position sensor Transmission x 1 Detects the home position of the platen.
Photo-interrupter
4 Paper feed timing sensor Transmission Detects the paper edge at paper feed time.
Photo-interrupter with arm
5 Direct chuck sensor Reflection Detects paper at the platen chuck.
Photo-interrupter
6 Paper jamming sensor Transmission Detects a paper chuck error.
Photo-interrupter with arm
7 Platen temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the platen ambient temperature.
8 Ribbon take-up FG sensor Transmission x 1 Detects rotation of the ribbon take-up motor.
Photo-interrupter
9 Ribbon supply FG sensor Transmission x 1 Detects rotation of the ribbon supply motor rotation.
Photo-interrupter
0 Ribbon tele-file antenna Board only Transmits the ribbon tele-file information.
!- Ribbon code sensor Transmission (with write guide) Detects the bar code of each ribbon color.
LED & phototransistor
!= Ribbon cartridge sensor Transmission Detects the ribbon cartridge.
LED & phototransistor
![ Paper removal timing sensor Transmission x 1 Detects a paper remove error and paper overflow in the paper
Photo-interrupter remove tray.
!] Paper feed FG sensor Transmission x 1 Detects how much paper is fed.
Photo-interrupter
!\ Tray position sensor Transmission x 2 Detects a tray motor cam position.
Photo-interrupter
!; Paper sensor Transmission x 1 Detects paper in the paper feeder tray.
Photo-interrupter
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-3

5-2. Description of Print Operation
A print operation is done by switching among five positions through the head cam and combining three
positions through the tray motor cam.
5-2-1. Position Change During Print Operation
Position Tray cam Operation

head cam
Home Home Home 1 Decides whether the ribbon cartridge and paper are set or not.
2 Takes up slack of the ribbon and transmits the ribbon tele-file.
Start of print operation
Paper feed FF1 Paper feed
*1 Indexes ribbon (yellow).
FF1 Paper feed 2 Feeds paper.
Chuck Paper feed 3 Chucks paper on platen.
FF1 Paper feed 4 Detects jamming.
FF1 Print 5 Sets the paper print position.
Print Print Print Prints yellow.
Fast feed FF2 Print Indexes ribbon (magenta).
Indexes paper.
Print Print Print Prints magenta.
Fast feed FF2 Print Indexes ribbon (cyan).
Indexes paper.
Print Print Print Prints cyan.
Removes paper FF1 Home 1 Starts paper removal.
FF1 Home 2 Opens platen chuck.
FF2 Print 3 Ejects paper to the paper remove unit.
FF1 Home 4 Places paper on the paper remove tray.
Home Home End of print operation
*
5-4 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5-2-2. Home Position
The above illustration shows that the printer is in the power-ON state.
. Both head cam and tray motor cam return to their home position at power-ON time.
. Platen goes back to its home position for positional initialization only when media are mounted.
. The printer detects whether both ribbon cartridge and paper are set or not, takes up ribbon slack and
transmits with ribbon tele-files.
. The printer head is preheated only when media are mounted.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-5

5-2-3. Paper Feed Position
Fig. 5 Paper feed position
Once the print button is pressed, the printer goes to the paper feed position to index the yellow ribbon.
If media are mounted after the power is turned on, the platen is initialized before a print operation is
started.
When indexing of the yellow ribbon is completed, the paper feed motor is activated to feed paper to the
chucking position. At this time, the tray motor cam is in the paper feed position to press-fit paper onto
the pickup roller with the paper feed lever up. In synchronization with this motion, the printer, using a
separation method, press-fits the separation roller onto the paper feed roller.
Once the direct chuck sensor confirms that paper has reached the chuck, the paper feed motor is stopped
to conduct a direct chuck operation.
When the chuck operation is completed, the printer starts rotating both platen motor and paper feed motor
in order to feed paper to the print start position. The paper fed by the paper feed roller is a little bit more
than that of the platen roller. If no paper reaches the chuck in the middle of operation, the paper jamming
sensor detects a chuck error and stops the print operation.
In such a case, remove the platen hatch at the bottom of the printer to eliminate paper.
m
. Be sure to add protective paper at the bottom of the paper feeder tray. Without protective paper, print
paper may be scratched or a paper feed error may occur.
. When refilling the paper feeder tray, put protective paper only at the bottom of the tray. If protective
paper is mixed with other paper in the tray, jamming may occur when the paper is printed.
. In case of a paper feed error, the paper feed lever may be lowered once to continue feeding the paper
again (up to two times). This is not a failure.
. The paper feed motor may rotate in reverse direction at the end of paper feeding or printing to return
paper to the paper feeder tray. This is not a failure.
5-6 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5-2-4. Print Position
The printer starts printing when the platen rotates at 236 d.

The head cam is rotated to press-fit the thermal head to the platen, and the tray motor cam is rotated.
Then, the paper remove flap is released to rotate the ribbon take-up motor, the ribbon supply motor, and
the platen.
The illustration shows the state in which cyan printing is started. At the beginning of yellow printing, the
rear edge of paper is left on the paper read flap.
5-2-5. Fast Feed Position
When printing of each color is finished, the thermal head is released from the platen to fast feed the
ribbon and paper.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-7

5-2-6. Paper Remove Position
The printer goes to the paper remove position after the end of cyan printing.
The head cam is rotated to release the thermal head from the platen. The tray motor cam is rotated to
activate the paper remove flap.
As the platen rotates, the chuck opens gradually to guide paper to the paper remove section through the
paper remove flap.
Finally, the tray motor cam is rotated in reverse direction to the print position and then in forward
direction to the home position. The paper remove arm is activated to drop paper on the paper remove
tray.
5-8 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5-3. Platen Drive Unit
The platen motor drives the platen and opens the chuck.
The platen drive uses two TN10 type belts (belt pitch: 1 mm) to minimize print nonuniformity. If a belt
skip is caused by jamming or other reasons, the belt may be damaged. In such a case, replace the belt
with a new one.
5-3-1. Gear Ratio of Platen Drive Unit
Flange B
81 150
x = 13.5
30 30
Platen pulley
Platen motor pulley
5-3-2. Print Nonuniformity
If each pulley is damaged, paper is horizontally striped at certain intervals. In such a case, replace the
pulley with a new one.
Platen motor pulley: 12.6 mm pitch

Platen pulley: 33.9 mm pitch
Flange B: Always at the same place
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-9

5-4. Paper Feed and Remove Drive Unit
The paper feed and remove drive unit is controlled by the motion of the paper feed motor and the tray motor cam, and is
independent of the head drive unit.
The pickup roller feeds paper from out of the paper feed tray. Several sheets of paper are fed out.
When these sheets of paper are fed between the paper feed roller and the separation roller, only the top sheet of paper is
sent to the print unit by the paper feed roller. The second and latter sheets are stopped by the separation roller and left as
they are. The reason is that the rotation of the paper feed motor is transmitted to the separation roller via the P limiter gear
assembly, although it is transmitted directly to the paper feed roller. The separation roller is press-fit to the paper feed
roller only when paper is fed.
When no paper is fed or when only a single sheet of paper is fed, the driving force transmitted directly from the paper feed
roller to the separation roller becomes greater than that transmitted from the P limiter gear assembly which is a torque
limiter. Gears A and B (have the same gear size and thus cannot be distinguished on the above illustration) of the P limiter
gear assembly slip and the separation roller also turn in a forward direction. When two or more sheets of paper are put
between the paper feed roller and the separation roller, the force transmitted directly from the paper feed roller to the
separation roller weakens because of paper slippage and the driving force from the P limiter gear assembly increases.
Gears A and B of the P limiter gear assembly rotate in the same direction and the separation roller rotates in the reverse
direction.
As mentioned above, a single sheet of paper is fed through the forward rotation of the separation roller. For two or more
sheets of paper, the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction and thus only the top sheet is fed and the second and
latter sheets are returned.
Printed paper is led into the paper feed and remove unit by the paper remove lead roller, and delivered to the paper remove
unit by the paper feed roller (rear side) and paper remove roller.
5-10 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

5-5. Direct Chuck Mechanism
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 5-11

With the conventional UP-5500 series, the paper chuck opens and closes by an approximate 60 d rotation
of the platen.
The reason for using a new direct chuck mechanism is that it is preferable to be able to close the chuck
with the platen stopped in order to reserve chuck reliability on the assumption that multiple kinds of
media have a different coefficient of friction.
The chuck is opened during rotation as usual.
The direct chuck mechanism can be operated only when both platen and chuck timing cam are at the
home position, as described below.
The head cam is rotated at 120 d. This motion is transmitted from chuck link A to chuck link B, to chuck
link C, then it directs the chuck arm to rotate the chuck timing cam at 60 d. Therefore, the chuck timing
cam turns the platen shaft and the chuck cam rotates. Consequently, the spring force incorporated in the
chuck base closes the chuck.
As mentioned above, the chuck timing cam is rotated at 60 d to reproduce the same state as a 60 d rotation
of the platen.
5-12 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

Section 6
Troubleshooting
6-1. Video (Image) Related Trouble
The flow of a video signal in UP-50 series is shown in the figure below.
[Flow of video signal]
Input block Monitor output block

SG MONITOR
VIDEO.S-VIDEO.RGB
IF-764 RELAY
VIDEO.S-VIDEO.RGB
Control
DECODER ENCODER
VPR-63 Digital RGB

A/D DRAM Control
SY-282
Tset Pattern MASKING
8bit DATA(Serial)
Control
PRT-13 HEAD DRIVER
8bit DATA(Parallel)
THERMAL HEAD
Print output block PRINTS
The flow of a video signal can be mainly classified into input, monitor output, and print output blocks.
The block in which a trouble occurs can be supposed from the trouble state.
1. Both the print result and monitor display are abnormal.

In this trouble state, a trouble occurs in the input block.
2. The print result is normal and the monitor display is abnormal.
In this trouble state, a trouble occurs in the monitor output block.
3. The print result is abnormal and the monitor display is normal.
In this trouble state, a trouble occurs in the print output block.
Each block is described below.

For more details, refer to the block diagram, schematic diagram, and circuit operation description of each
board.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 6-1

Input Block
In the input block, the flow of a signal is as follows:
Signal input terminal (IF-764) - ADC (VPR-63) - DRAM (VPR-63)
If a trouble is judged to occur in the input block, check the state of a video trouble fully. For fine
symptoms in dots, a trouble may occur in a digital processing system [ADC (around IC350 to IC352) -
DRAM (around IC801 and IC802)]. In other states, a trouble may occur in an analog processing system
[IF-764 - Decoder (around IC203) - ADC].
In the trouble of an analog processing system, the place where a trouble occurs can be more narrowed
down by checking the state of each signal (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, and RGB).
Monitor Output Block

In the monitor output block, the flow of a signal is as follows:
DRAM (VPR-63) - Encoder (VPR-63) - Signal output terminal (IF-764)
Like an input processing block, it can be supposed to some degree by the trouble state whether the block
where a trouble occurs is a digital processing system [DRAM - encoder (around IC407)] or analog
processing system (encoder - IF-764).
The place where a trouble occurs can be more narrowed down by the state of each monitor output signal
(VIDEO, S-VIDEO, and RGB).
Print Output Block

In the print output block, the flow of a signal is as follows:
DRAM (VPR-63) - Masking (VPR-63) - Head control (PRT-13) - Thermal head
The data output from DRAM on the VPR-63 board is input through the masking circuit (around IC902
and IC903) on the VPR-63 board to the head control circuit (around IC217, IC222, and IC226) on the
PRT-13 board.
Moreover, the print signal that was converted from serial to parallel in the head control block is output
through a cable to the thermal head.
6-2. Mechanical Troubleshooting
6-2-1. Outline
The trouble in the mechanical deck of a printer is mainly classified into the following.
1. Paper feed trouble such as incorrect paper feed or overlapped paper feed
2. Paper delivery trouble such as paper jamming occurring after print
3. Print trouble appearing as the result of print
Examples are given for each trouble, and the designation of a place and the way of solving are described.
6-2 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

6-2-2. Paper Feed Trouble
Paper is incorrectly chucked and a print image is inclined.

Place: Paper feed block assembly
Cause: Friction loss of paper due to the deterioration in a paper feed rubber or incorrect chuck due to
the damage of parts
Remedy: Clean the paper feed roller or replace parts.
Paper is fed in overlap.

Remedy: Check the torque limiter and separation roller.
During paper feeding, the roller rotates, but paper is not carried.
Place: Paper feed tray assembly
Cause: Deformation in the hook of a paper feed tray or paper is folded when it is put into a tray.
6-2-3. Paper Delivery Trouble
Paper is jammed near the delivery port of paper.

Cause: Drop of a paper delivery flap attached on the paper feed block assembly or damage of a
supporting block
6-2-4. Print Trouble
In a print image, spots (or stripes or creases) occur in the horizontal direction.
Cause: Flaw in the gear of a platen motor or its damage
Incorrect setting of ribbon tension
Remedy: Replace parts or change the setting value of tension.
In a print image, spots (or stripes) occur in the vertical direction.

Cause: Broken thermal head (or irregular resistance value)
Remedy: Replace parts.
In a print image, three colors are shaded.

Cause: Loss of synchronism in platen
Remedy: Check that the gear and belt between the pulse motor and platen are not out of teeth.
The color of a print image is not adjusted.

Remedy: Adjust the color using a color balance.
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 6-3

6-2-5. Other Troubles
The cause was eliminated, but message “sequence err 08” is displayed and the printer is not retuned to the
normal state.
Cause: The system cam is out of place.
Remedy: Disassemble and assemble the system cam.
m
If message “sequence err **” is displayed for except described above, refer to the NG_CODE table at the
end of this manual.
6-3. Cleaning
The thermal head and paper feed roller can be cleaned.

To clean the thermal head and paper feed roller, use a cleaning ribbon and paper feed roller cleaning sheet.
6-3-1. Thermal Head Cleaning
The thermal head is cleaned when a print defect occurs due to the dirt on the thermal head.
Procedure
1. Insert the ribbon holder into which a cleaning ribbon was put.
2. Select “CLEAN HEAD” in a “CLEANING” menu and press the EXEC button.
3. The thermal head cleaning is then started.
m
. Clean it once every 200 sheets of paper when cleaning the thermal head periodically.
. Clean the thermal head only once during cleaning.
. Do not clean the thermal head several times simultaneously. This wears the thermal head more and
more.
6-3-2. Paper Feed Roller Cleaning
The paper feed roller is cleaned when a paper feed defect frequently occurs during printing.
Procedure
1. Apply cleaning fluid to a paper feed roller cleaning sheet and put it into an empty tray.
2. Set the empty tray, into which a paper feed roller cleaning sheet was put, to the printer.
3. Select “CLEAN RLLR” in a “CLEANING” menu and press the EXEC button
4. The paper feed roller cleaning is then started.
m
. Do not clean the paper feed roller with the cleaning sheet not put or the cleaning sheet to which no
cleaning fluid is applied put in an empty tray.
. Clean the paper feed roller about once a month as standard.
. Replace the cleaning sheet used ten times with a new one as standard.
For more details, refer to the Operation Manual of a cleaning kit.
6-4 UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

NG Command List 1
A way of looking list: Refer to the displayed NG data.
NG_CODE1
NG command NG data Contents of NG Symptom Board/REF Check item
h’E1 h’08 HEAD_HOME_TIME_OUT Cannot return head to HOME position. SE-539 board/IC608,IC613 . Connector connection
h’09 HEAD_PRN_FF1_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from PRINT to FF1 position (before removing paper). SE-547 board/PH9-PH12 PRT-13 board/CN401,CN601
h’0a HEAD_FF2_HOME_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF2 to HOME position. SE-548 board/PH13 SE-539 board/CN102,CN105,CN150,CN604,CN610
h’0b HEAD_FF2_CHUCK_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF2 to CHUCK position. SU-52 board/M1 SE-547 board/CN8
h’0c HEAD_FF1_HOME_TIMEOUTM Cannot return head from FF1 to HOME position (during initialization). SE-548 board/CN9
SU-52 board/CN51
h’10 HEAD_PRN_FF2_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from PRINT to FF2 position (before indexing of each color).
h’11 HEAD_FF1_PRN_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF1 to PRINT position.
h’12 HEAD_HOME_FF1_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from HOME to FF1 position (when feeding paper).
h’13 HEAD_HOME_FF2_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from HOME to FF2 position (during initialization).
h’14 HEAD_FF2_FF1_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF2 to FF1 position (during initialization).
h’15 HEAD_FF2_PRN_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF2 to PRINT position (after indexing of each color).
h’16 HEAD_FF1_FF2_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF1 to FF2 position.
h’17 HEAD_FF1_CHUCK_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF1 to CHUCK position (when feeding paper).
h’18 HEAD_CHUCK_FF1_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from CHUCK to FF1 position.
h’19 HEAD_FF1_HOME_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF1 to HOME position (when removing paper).
h’1a HEAD_TOUCH_FF1_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from TOUCH to FF1 position (when removing paper).
h’1b HEAD_FF1_TOUCH_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from FF1 to TOUCH position (when removing paper).
h’1c HEAD_CHUCK_PRN_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from CHUCK to PRINT position.
h’1d HEAD_CHUCK_FF2_TIMEOUT Cannot return head from CHUCK to FF2 position (when feeding paper).
h’1e HEAD_POS_HOME_ERROR Cannot return head to HOME position.
h’1f HEAD_POS_ERROR Cannot return head to any position.
h’21 TRAY_HOME_LOAD_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from HOME to LOAD position (when feeding paper).
h’22 TRAY_LOAD_PRN_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from LOAD to PRINT position (when feeding paper). SE-539 board/IC607 . Connector connection
h’23 TRAY_LOAD_PRN_TIMEOUT2 Cannot return tray arm from LOAD to PRINT position. SE-554 board/PH19,20 PRT-13 board/CN401
h’24 TRAY_PRN_HOME_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from PRINT to HOME position (when removing paper). SU-53 board/M2 SE-539 board/CN103,CN150,CN604,CN610
h’25 TRAY_HOME_PRN_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from HOME to PRINT position (when removing paper). SE-554 board/CN15
h’26 TRAY_HOME_CW_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm to HOME position (during initialization). SU-53 board/CN52
h’27
h’28 TRAY_PRN_HOME_TIMEOUTM Cannot return tray arm from PRINT to HOME position (during initialization).
h’29 TRAY_LOAD_HOME_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from LOAD to HOME position (when feeding paper).
h’2a TRAY_PAPER_OUT_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from LOAD to PRINT position.
h’2b TRAY_PAPER_IN_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from HOME to LOAD position (when feeding paper).
h’2c TRAY_IN_OUT_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from LOAD to PRINT position.
h’2d TRAY_HOME_OUT_TIMEOUT Cannot return tray arm from HOME to PRINT position (during initialization).
(Continue)
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 (i) (i)

(Continued)
h’33 RIBBON_YMCL_END Take-up or supply FG does not work when indexing a ribbon (timeout). SE-539 board/IC606,609 . Connector connection
h’34 RIBBON_Y_TIMEOUT No index mark comes during yellow indexing (timeout). SE-544 board/PH5,PH6,D1,D2 PRT-13 board/CN401,CN601
RIBBON_MCL_TIMEOUT No index mark comes during magenta, cyan or laminate indexing (timeout). SE-545 board/PH7 SE-539 board/CN101,CN102,CN150,CN604,CN610
SE-546 board/PH8 SE-545 board/CN6
SU-55 board/M4 SE-546 board/CN7
SU-56 board/M5 SU-55 board/CN54
SU-56 board/CN55
h’41 PLT_HOME_ERR Cannot return platen to HOME position (during initialization). SE-539 board/IC602 . Connector connection
h’42 PLT_EDGE_ERR Edge at HOME position fails to detect platen (when feeding paper). SE-540 board/PH1 PRT-13 board/CN401,CN601
h’43 PLT_HOME_EJCT_ERR Platen does not travel from HOME position for 50 pls (during initialization). PLT_MTR SE-539 board/CN101,CN150,CN601,CN610
h’44 PLT_PP_EJCT_ERR Platen does not travel from HOME position for 1215 pls (during initialization). SE-540 board/CN1
h’48 PLT_ACT_ERR Platen out-of-step error (during printing)
h’51 LOAD_TMG_TIMEOUT Paper feed timing sensor is not turned on (when feeding paper). SE-539 board/IC610,611,612 . Connector connection
h’52 LOAD_TMG_FGOUT Paper feed FG sensor is not turned on or off (when feeding paper). SE-550 board/PH15 PRT-13 board/CN401,CN601
h’53 LOAD_CHUCK_TIMEOUT DC sensor is not turned on (when chucking). SE-552 board/PH17 SE-539 board/CN101,CN150,CN605,CN610
h’54 LOAD_CHUCK_FGOUT Paper feed FG sensor is not turned on or off (when chucking). SU-54 board/M13 SE-550 board/CN11
h’55 LOAD_PAPER_FGOUT Paper feed FG sensor is not turned on or off (when returning paper). SE-552 board/CN13
SU-54 board/CN53
h’58 EJCT_TMG_TIMEOUT Paper remove timing sensor is not turned on. SE-539 board/IC610 . Connector connection
h’59 EJCT_FG_TIMEOUT Paper remove timing sensor is not turned on even when paper remove FG is constantly counting (when removing paper). SE-550 board/PH15 PRT-13 board/CN401 CN601
h’5a EJCT_TMG_TMOUT_PP Paper remove timing sensor is not turned on even after a certain period of time (when removing paper). SE-551 board/PH16 SE-539 board/CN106,CN150,CN605,CN610
h’5b EJCT_FG_TMOUT_PP Paper remove timing sensor is not turned on even when paper remove FG is constantly counting (during initialization). SE-550 board/CN11
h’5f EJCT_TMG_RESQ Paper remove timing sensor is not turned on even after a certain period of time (during initialization). SE-551 board/CN12
SU-54 Board/CN53
h’62 PP_JAM_ERR Printing paper is not wound around platen (when feeding paper). SE-541 board/PH2 PRT-13 board/CN401
h’63 PLT_JAM_ERR Printing paper is not wound around platen. SE-542 board/PH3 SE-539 board/CN104,CN150
h’68 CHUCK_MS_ERR Printing paper is out of platen (when printing). SE-541 board/CN2
SE-542 board/CN3
h’70 RBN_CD_ALARM Dynamic range of RBN_CD sensor is 0.4 V or less because of dust. SE-544 board/PH6,D1 Deterioration in sensitivity due to dust
h’72 PPJAM_ALARM Dynamic range of PP_JAM sensor is 0.4 V or less because of dust. SE-542 board/PH3
h’73 PLT_CHUCK_ALARM Dynamic range of PLT_CHUCK sensor is 0.4 V or less because of dust. SE-541 board/PH2
Other possible causes * Motor or sensor unit failure
* Sensor has no sensitivity because of a mechanism assembly error.
(ii) (ii) UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

NG Command List 2
A way looking the list: For NG_CODE2, h’42 = 0100 0010 (Refer to HEX code converting as binary)
NG sensors are located in the first bit (LOAD_TMG sensor) and sixth bit (PP_JAM sensor).
NG_CODE0
h’E0 BIT 6 PP_JAM_ERROR — SE-542 board/PH3 Printing paper is inside mechanism deck.
BIT 5 END_OF_RIBBON — SE-544/PH5,D1 End of ribbon
BIT 4 NO_RIBBON — SE-544/PH6,D2 Ribbon cartridge is not set.
BIT 3 NO_PAPER — SE-553 board/PH18 Printing paper is not set.
BIT 2 REMOVE_PRINTS — SE-551 board/PH16 EJECT_TMG sensor is on.
BIT 1 REMOVE_PRINTS — SE-550 board/PH15 LOAD_TMG sensor is on.
BIT 0 —
NG_CODE2
h’E2 BIT 6 PP_JAM sensor — SE-542 board/PH . Connector connection

BIT 5 — . Defective parts
BIT 4 RBN_CST sensor — SE-544 board/PH6,D2 . Sensor is on because of mechanism assembly error.
BIT 3 PAPER sensor — SE-553 board/PH18
BIT 2 EJCT_TMG sensor — SE-551 board/PH16
BIT 1 LOAD_TMG sensor — SE-550 board/PH15
BIT 0 KICK_OUT sensor — SE-560 board
NG_CODE3
h’E3 BIT 6 head thermistor Thermistor is shorting (1.9 V or less). Thermal head . Connector connection
BIT 5 Harness is not inserted into thermal head (4.0 V or more). . Thermal head
BIT 4 room thermistor Thermistor is shorting (1.9 V or less). SE-539 board/TH1 . Connector connection
BIT 3 Harness is not inserted into SE-539 board (4.0 V or more). . Defective parts
BIT 2 platen thermistor Thermistor is shorting (1.9 V or less). SE-555 board/THP1 . Connector connection
BIT 1 Harness is not inserted into SE-555 board (4.0 V or more). . Defective parts
BIT 0 EEPROM ERROR Nothing can be read or written correctly. . Defective parts
UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1 (iii) (iii)

NG_CODE4
h’E4 BIT 6 RIBBON_CD_ERROR PH5 sensitivity is not high enough (2.5 V or more). SE-544 board/PH5,D1 . Connector connection/Defective parts
BIT 5 PH5 dynamic range is 4.0 V or less. . The optical axis is out of the place
BIT 4 PLATEN_CHECK_ERROR PH2 sensitivity is not high enough (2.5 V or more). SE-541 board/PH2 . Connector connection/Defective parts
BIT 3 PH2 dynamic range is 3.5 V or less. . The optical axis is out of the place
BIT 2 LOAD_FG_ERROR Paper feed FG is not rotating. SE-545 board/PH7 . Connector connection/Defective parts
SU-54 board/M13
BIT 1 RIBBON_FG_ERROR (Take up) Ribbon take-up FG is not rotating. SE-552 board/PH17 . Connector connection/Defective parts
SU-55 board/M4
BIT 0 RIBBON_FG_ERROR (Supply) Ribbon supply FG is not rotating. SE-546 board/PH8
SU-56 board/M5
(iv) (iv) UP-50/51MD/51MDU/51MDP (E) V1

SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem,

perform the following safety checks before
releasing the set to the customer :
Check the metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws,

and all other exposed metal parts for AC
leakage. Check leakage as described below.
LEAKAGE TEST
The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to

earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to
any exposed metal part having a return to
chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA. Leakage
current can be measured by any one of three
methods.
1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the

Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the
manufacturers’ instructions to use these
instruments.
2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The
Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is
suitable for this job.
3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor
by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC
voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.5 V, so
analog meters must have an accurate low-
voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa
SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM
that is suitable. (See Fig. A)
To Exposed Metal
Parts on Set
10 kZ
AC
1.0 kZ 0.015 µF voltmeter
(0.5V)
Earth Ground
Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
UP-50 (UC)
UP-51MD (UC)
UP-51MDU (UC) Printed in Japan
UP-51MDP (CE) E Sony Corporation 2000. 7 22
9-955-233-11 Communication System Solutions Network Company ©2000

UP-50 &amp; UP-51MD &amp; UP-51MDU &amp; UP-51MDP Volume 1 1st Edition

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

UP-50 &amp; UP-51MD &amp; UP-51MDU &amp; UP-51MDP Volume 1 1st Edition

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

COLOR VIDEO PRINTER

Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................. 5

2-1. Main Parts Location .................................................................................... 2-1

3. Electrical Alignment and Mechanical Alignment

3-1. Electrical Adjustment .................................................................................. 3-1

4. Circuit Operation Description

4-1. Digital Video Signal Processing Block ....................................................... 4-1

5-1. Description of Mechanisms ......................................................................... 5-1

6-1. Video (Image) Related Trouble .................................................................. 6-1

Purpose of this manual

. Service Manual Vol. 2 (Not supplied for products.)

. Operation Manual (Supplied for products.)

. “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (Available on request)

Gebrauchsanweisung Seite 282 DE

2000 Sony Corporation

Owner’s Record Important safeguards/notices for use in the

WARNING an additional protective earth terminal to system

Table of Contents (Continued) About This Manual

4 Table of Contents Introduction 5

About This Manual (Continued) System Overview

Index Printout of a full-size image Printout of 16 reduced images

Monitor and printer window displays

Printout of two reduced images Printout of identical images

Printout of four reduced images

Printout of 8 reduced images

In addition to the above printouts of multiple reduced images, printout of multiple

System Overview (Continued) Before Printing

Before Printing (Continued)

Spool holding the ink ribbon

Start position mark

5 Remove any slack from the ink ribbon.

Wind the spools alternately

When the ink ribbon cartridge cannot be ejected

1 Remove the spool 2 Remove the other spool.

Before Printing (Continued)

UP-5000/5100 and UP-5500 series color video printer.

2 Push the paper tray.

Before Printing (Continued)

Selecting the Input Signal 3 Select the desired input signal.

Printer window display

2 Press the INPUT SELECT button.

The currently selected input

The currently selected input signal

Before Printing (Continued) Making Full-Size Image Printouts

1 Turn on the video monitor and the printer.

INPUT SETUP COLOR : 200

Position the cursor at INPUT SEL by Q1 A 1 S

4 Select the desired input signal by pressing the G or g button. Q1 A 1 S

INPUT SETUP COLOR : 200

Switch the desired input signal to green by

5 Press the INPUT SETUP button.

Making Full-Size Image Printouts (Continued)

Blinks while printing

The previous image is replaced with the new one.

Making Full-Size Image Printouts (Continued)

When you want to see an image that is hidden below a screen

If a black line appears on the printout Note

When storing your printouts:

3 Press the LOAD USER button.

The currently selected user set

The currently selected user set number

Continue to the next page c

Making Full-Size Image Printouts (Continued)

4 Select the user set number.

UP-50 & UP-51MD & UP-51MDU & UP-51MDP Volume 1 1st Edition

UP-50 & UP-51MD & UP-51MDU & UP-51MDP Volume 1 1st Edition